Argosy Driver's Manual PDF

ARGOSY
Drivers Manual
STI-385-2
A24-00879-000
Foreword
Introduction if an air bag is installed, or if the vehicle features a

collision avoidance system, etc.).
This manual provides information needed to operate
and understand the vehicle and its components. Customer Assistance Center
More detailed information is contained in the Owners
Warranty Information for North America booklet, and Having trouble finding service? Call the Customer
in the vehicles workshop and maintenance manuals. Assistance Center at 1-800-385-4357 or 1-800-FTL-
HELP. Call night or day, weekdays or weekends, for
Custom-built Freightliner vehicles are equipped with dealer referral, vehicle information, breakdown coor-
various chassis and cab components. Not all of the dination, or Fleetpack assistance. Our people are
information contained in this manual applies to every knowledgeable, professional, and committed to fol-
vehicle. For details about components in your ve- lowing through to help you keep your truck moving.
hicle, refer to the chassis specification pages in-
cluded in all new vehicles and to the component in-
formation label, located inside the vehicle.
For your reference, keep this manual in the vehicle
at all times.
IMPORTANT: Descriptions and specifications in
this manual were in effect at the time of printing.
Freightliner Trucks reserves the right to discon-
tinue models and to change specifications or
design at any time without notice and without
incurring obligation. Descriptions and specifica-
tions contained in this publication provide no
warranty, expressed or implied, and are subject
to revisions and editions without notice.
Environmental Concerns and

Recommendations
Whenever you see instructions in this manual to dis-
card materials, you should first attempt to reclaim
and recycle them. To preserve our environment, fol-
low appropriate environmental rules and regulations
when disposing of materials.
Event Data Recorder

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices
that record specific vehicle data. The type and
amount of data recorded varies depending on how
the vehicle is equipped (such as the brand of engine,
20072015 Daimler Trucks North America LLC. All rights reserved. Daimler Trucks North America LLC is a Daimler
company.
No part of this publication, in whole or part, may be translated, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written per-
mission of Daimler Trucks North America LLC. For additional information, please contact Daimler Trucks North
America LLC, Service Systems and Documentation, P.O. Box 3849, Portland OR 972083849 U.S.A. or refer to
www.Daimler-TrucksNorthAmerica.comand www.FreightlinerTrucks.com.
STI-385-2 (11/14)
Part Number A24-00879-000
Printed in U.S.A.
Contents
Chapter Page
Introduction, Environmental Concerns and Recommendations,
Event Data Recorder, Customer Assistance Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword
1 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
2 Vehicle Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
3 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
4 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
5 Driver Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
6 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
7 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
8 Cab and Sleeper Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
9 Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
10 Optional Engine Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
11 Emissions Reduction Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
12 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
13 Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
14 Manual Transmissions and Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
15 Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
16 Drive Axle Feature Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
17 Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
18 Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
19 Headlight Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
20 Cab Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
21 In an Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
22 Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
23 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1
1
Vehicle Identification
Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Vehicle Identification
Component Information Label

The component information label lists the vehicle
model, identification number, and major component
models. It also lists the major assemblies and instal-
lations shown on the chassis specification sheet. The
component information label is typically attached to
the passenger-side dash. An illustration of the label
is shown in Fig. 1.1.
02/20/2012 f080176
Fig. 1.1, Component Information Label
1.1
2
Vehicle Access
Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Cab Access, Fixed Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Cab Access, Mobile Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Back-of-Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Opening the Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Cab Tilt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
Vehicle Access
Door Locks and Handles nal position to remove it. Pull out on the paddle
handle to open the door.
One common key operates the ignition switch and all
NOTE: The cab door locks can be operated
of the door locks.
when the doors are open.
IMPORTANT: Each key is numbered. Record
To lock a door from outside the cab, insert the key in
the number so a duplicate key can be made, if
the lock and turn it opposite the unlocking direction
needed. (counterclockwise for the left-hand door, clockwise
To unlock the right-hand door from outside the cab, for the right-hand door). See Fig. 2.2.
insert the key in the lock and turn it one-quarter turn To lock a door from inside the cab, push the lock
counterclockwise. Turn the key to the original posi- knob down or press the automatic lock button on the
tion to remove it. See Fig. 2.1. door armrest, depending on what the vehicle is
equipped with. See Fig. 2.2. To unlock the door from
inside, pull the lock knob up or press the unlock but-
4 ton on the door armrest, depending on what the ve-
hicle is equipped with.
3
Cab Access, Fixed Steps
WARNING
Wet or dirty shoes greatly increase the chance of
slipping or falling. If your shoes are wet or dirty,
be especially careful when entering or exiting the
vehicle.
2 Always maintain three-point contact with the ve-
hicle when entering or exiting the cab. Three-
point contact means both feet and one hand, or
both hands and one foot.
Do not jump from the vehicle.
The grab handles, access steps, and steering wheel
are all part of the cab access system. Use these
"helping hands" when getting into or out of the cab to
increase your security and comfort.
Left Side Entry

1 1. Open the left-hand door and place anything that
you are carrying in the cab.
05/03/2012 f720751
1. Exterior Deck 4. Mobile Stairs Override 2. Grasp the aft grab handle with your right hand
2. Door Handle Button and the forward grab handle with your left hand.
3. Forward Grab Handle See Fig. 2.3.
Fig. 2.1, Door Exterior (right side shown) 3. Place your right foot on the bottom step and pull
yourself up.
To unlock the left-hand door from outside the cab, 4. Place your left foot on the middle step, reaching
insert the key in the lock and turn it one-quarter turn
higher on both grab handles.
clockwise. Turn the key counterclockwise to the origi-
2.1
Vehicle Access
4 5 6
2 3 4
1 2 3
04/27/2012 f720748
1. Upper Door Grab 5. Forward Grab Handle
Handle 6 Aft Grab Handle
2. Door Pocket 7. Top Step
1 3. Exterior Deck 8. Middle Step
04/16/2012 f720747 4. A-Pillar Grab Handle 9. Bottom Step
1. Door Pocket 4. Upper Door Grab
2. Lock Knob Handle Fig. 2.3, Fixed Steps and Grab Handles, Left Side (RHD
3. Door Handle shown)
Fig. 2.2, Door Interior 7. Step into the cab with your right foot first.
5. Place your right foot on the top step and pull Left Side Exit
yourself up.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab
NOTE: The left side of the cab is equipped with while carrying any items in your hands.
an A-pillar grab handle or the steering wheel,
depending on whether the vehicle is left-hand 1. If you take items with you, place them in an ac-
drive (LHD) or right-hand drive (RHD). cessible location on the seat or cab floor. Make
sure they will not get in your way as you exit.
6. Move your right hand to the forward grab handle
and your left hand to the steering wheel or WARNING
A-pillar grab handle, then place your left foot on
the deck. Always face in when exiting the cab. Do not at-
tempt to exit with your back to the cab, as you
2.2
Vehicle Access
would going down a flight of stairs. It is easier to 7

slip or lose your balance. If you slip when exiting
in this way, there is a greater likelihood of per-
sonal injury. 9
NOTE: The left side of the cab is equipped with

an A-pillar grab handle or the steering wheel, 8
depending on whether the vehicle is LHD or
RHD.
2. Grasp the steering wheel or A-pillar grab handle
with your left hand, place your right hand on the
forward sidewall grab handle, and place both feet 6
on the deck, facing into the cab.
3. Grasp the forward grab handle with your left
hand and move your right hand to the aft grab
handle.
4. Move your right foot to the top step.
5. Move your left foot to the middle step and lower
your hands on both grab handles. 5
6. Move your right foot to the bottom step. 4
7. Step to the ground with your left foot first. 3
Right Side Entry 2

1. Open the right-hand door and place anything that 1
you are carrying in the cab.
05/04/2012 f720749
2. Grasp the aft sidewall grab handle with your left 1. Bottom Step 6 Upper Door Grab
hand and the forward grab handle with your right 2. Middle Step Handle
hand. See Fig. 2.4. 3. Top Step 7. Steering Wheel
4. Exterior Deck 8. Forward Grab Handle
3. Place your left foot on the bottom step and pull 5. Door Pocket 9. Aft Grab Handle
yourself up.
Fig. 2.4, Fixed Steps and Grab Handles, Right Side
4. Place your right foot on the middle step, reaching (RHD shown)
higher on both grab handles.
5. Place your left foot on the top step and pull your- Right Side Exit
self up.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab
NOTE: The right side of the cab is equipped while carrying any items in your hands.
with an A-pillar grab handle or the steering
1. If you take items with you, place them in an ac-
wheel, depending on whether the vehicle is LHD
cessible location on the seat or cab floor. Make
or RHD. sure they will not get in your way as you exit.
6. Move your left hand to the forward grab handle
and your right hand to the steering wheel or WARNING
A-pillar grab handle, then place your right foot on
the deck. Always face in when exiting the cab. Do not at-
7. Step into the cab with your left foot first. tempt to exit with your back to the cab, as you
would going down a flight of stairs. It is easier to
slip or lose your balance. If you slip when exiting
2.3
Vehicle Access
in this way, there is a greater likelihood of per- vehicle is in motion (stairs automatically stow if
sonal injury. the vehicle begins to move)
NOTE: The right side of the cab is equipped sensors detect weight on the stairs
with an A-pillar grab handle or the steering cab is tilted
or RHD. an obstacle is encountered in the stair travel
path
with your right hand, place your left hand on the the disable button is pressed
forward sidewall grab handle, and place both feet To prevent deployment of the stairs from outside the
on the deck, facing into the cab. vehicle, press the button on the side of the cab, di-
3. Grasp the forward grab handle with your right rectly above the stairs, before opening the door. See
hand and move your left hand to the aft grab Fig. 2.1.
handle. To prevent deployment of the stairs from inside the
4. Move your left foot to the top step. cab, press the dash rocker switch labeled RH STEP
or LH STEP while opening the cab door. See
5. Move your right foot to the middle step and lower Fig. 2.5.
your hands on both grab handles.
6. Move your left foot to the bottom step.
7. Step to the ground with your right foot first.
2
Cab Access, Mobile Stairs 1
WARNING
Wet or dirty shoes greatly increase the chance of
slipping or falling. If your shoes are wet or dirty,
be especially careful when entering or exiting the 04/24/2012 f611182
vehicle. 1. Right-Hand Stairs 2. Left-Hand Stairs
Switch Switch
Always maintain three-point contact with the ve-
hicle when entering or exiting the cab. Three- Fig. 2.5, Mobile Stairs Deployment Switches
point contact means both feet and one hand, or
both hands and one foot. NOTE: Pressing the disable button or switch will
disable the stairs for one cycle of opening and
Do not jump from the vehicle.
closing the door. You must press the disable
The grab handles, access steps, and steering wheel button each time you want to prevent deploy-
are all part of the cab access system. Use these ment of the stairs.
"helping hands" when getting into or out of the cab.
They will increase your security and comfort. Left Side Entry
The mobile stairs will deploy when the cab door is 1. Open the left-hand door and place anything that
opened. As the stairs deploy, an audible alert sounds you are carrying in the cab.
outside the vehicle. If anything prevents deployment
of the stairs, a buzzer will sound and an indicator will 2. Grasp the aft grab handle (Fig. 2.6) with your
illuminate on the dash. right hand and grab the forward grab handle with
your left hand, reaching up as far as is
The cab stairs will not operate under the following comfortable.
conditions:
3. Place your right foot on the bottom step and pull
parking brake is not set
yourself up.
2.4
Vehicle Access
7 Left Side Exit

6 IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab
5 while carrying any items in your hands.
NOTE: The left side of the cab is equipped with
an A-pillar grab handle or the steering wheel,
4 RHD.
with both hands, and stand on the deck at the
3 top of the stairs facing into the cab.
2. With your right hand, grasp the forward grab
handle.
2 3. Move your right foot to the top step.
4. Move your left hand to the forward grab handle
1 and move your left foot to the middle step.
5. Move your right hand to the aft grab handle and
move your right foot to the bottom step.
6. Step to the ground with your left foot.
08/10/98 f720309
1. Bottom Step 5. Aft Grab Handle Right Side Entry

2. Middle Step 6. Forward Grab Handle
3. Top Step 7. Steering Wheel 1. Open the right-hand door and place anything that
4. Top Deck you are carrying in the cab.
Fig. 2.6, Mobile Stairs, Left-Hand Side 2. Grasp the aft grab handle with your left hand and
grab the forward grab handle with your right
4. Place your left foot on the middle step and pull hand, reaching up as far as youre comfortable.
yourself up. See Fig. 2.7.
5. Move your left hand to the forward grab handle, 3. Place your left foot on the bottom step and pull
then place your left foot on the top step. yourself up.
NOTE: The left side of the cab is equipped with 4. Place your right foot on the middle step and pull
an A-pillar grab handle or the steering wheel, yourself up.
5. Move your right hand to the forward grab handle,
RHD.
then place your right foot on the top step.
6. Pull yourself up and place your right foot on the
NOTE: The right side of the cab is equipped
top deck and move your left hand to the A-pillar
grab handle or steering wheel. with an A-pillar grab handle or the steering
7. Move your right hand to the steering wheel or or RHD.
A-pillar grab handle.
6. Pull yourself up and place your left foot on the
8. With both hands gripping the steering wheel or top deck and move your right hand to the A-pillar
A-pillar grab handle, move your right foot into the grab handle or steering wheel.
cab.
7. Move your left hand to the steering wheel or
A-pillar grab handle.
2.5
Vehicle Access
NOTE: The right side of the cab is equipped

with an A-pillar grab handle or the steering
7 wheel, depending on whether the vehicle is LHD
or RHD.
9
with both hands, and stand on the deck at the
8 top of the stairs facing into the cab.
2. With your left hand, grasp the forward grab
handle.
3. Move your left foot to the top step.
4. Move your right hand to the forward grab handle
6 and move your right foot to the middle step.
5. Move your left hand to the aft grab handle and
move your left foot to the bottom step.
6. Step to the ground with your right foot.
Mobile Stair Lock-Up Procedures

5 Access Stairs Will Not Fully Deploy
4 1. Close the cab door.
2. Ensure the parking brake is set.
3. Inspect for an obstruction in the travel path of the
steps.
3
4. Start the engine to increase battery voltage.
5. If the vehicle is parked at an incline greater than
2 3.5 degrees in any direction, move it to a level
1 surface (if conditions permit).
6. Open the door again. If the steps will not fully
05/16/2012 f720750
deploy, but will return to a fully stowed position,
press the RH STEP or LH STEP switch while
1. Bottom Step 6 Upper Door Grab opening the cab door.
2. Middle Step Handle
3. Top Step 7. Steering Wheel 7. Enter and exit the cab using the access instruc-
4. Exterior Deck 8. Forward Grab Handle tions for fixed steps.
5. Door Pocket 9. Aft Grab Handle
Fig. 2.7, Mobile Stairs and Grab Handles, Right-Hand
Access Stairs Will Not Fully Stow
Side (RHD shown) 1. Open and close the door.
8. With both hands gripping the steering wheel or 2. Inspect for an obstruction in the travel path of the
A-pillar grab handle, move your left foot into the steps.
cab.
3. Start the engine to increase battery voltage.
Right Side Exit 4. If the vehicle is parked at an incline greater than
3.5 degrees in any direction, move it to a level
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab surface (if conditions permit).
while carrying any items in your hands.
2.6
Vehicle Access
5. Open and close the door again. If the steps still

will not stow, leave the door open and exit the
cab from the opposite side.
6. Place a hand on the exterior surface of the step,
then apply light pressure to the step while clos- 4
ing the door.
7. If the step stows, press the yellow disable button
next to the grab handle. This will disable the step
for cycle of opening and closing the door.
6
8. If the steps will not fully stow, follow the instruc- 5
tions on the inside of the baggage door to safely
stow the steps.
Back-of-Cab Access 3
Grab handles are typically located on the backwall of
the cab or sleeper, or on the inside of the cab ex-
tender, if equipped. See Fig. 2.8. A grab handle may
also be provided on the exhaust stack. Steps may be
mounted on the fuel tank(s), battery or tool box(es),
or on metal brackets secured to the frame rail. A
deck plate is mounted across the top of the frame 2
rails. All other areas are not meant to support back-
of-cab access. 1
05/09/2012 f720752
1. Bottom Step 4. Inboard Grab Handle
WARNING 2. Top Step 5. Deck Plates
3. Outboard Grab 6. Exhaust-Mounted
Follow these rules for back-of-cab access. Failing Handle Grab Handle
to follow these rules could lead to a fall, and pos-
sible personal injury. Fig. 2.8, Back-of-Cab Access
Never step on any exterior part unless it has a Never jump onto, or off of, a vehicle; doing so
slip-resistant surface meant for safe stepping. If creates a very high likelihood of a fall and per-
the surface is movable, such as a battery box sonal injury.
cover with a slip-resistant surface, be certain it is
firmly secured. Wet or dirty shoe soles greatly increase the chance
of slipping or falling. If your soles are wet or dirty, be
Be careful not to trip on items such as chains or especially careful when accessing the back-of-cab
air lines in the back-of-cab area. area.
Always follow safety procedures for back-of-cab Be careful not to get hands or feet tangled in hoses
access, maintaining three-point contactboth or other back-of-cab equipment. Carelessness could
hands and one foot, or both feet and one hand cause a person to trip and fall, with possible injury.
whenever moving around, and always face in to-
ward the deck plate when climbing up or down. Accessing Back-of-Cab Area
Wet or dirty shoes, steps, or grab rails greatly
increase the chance of slipping or falling. If your WARNING
shoes or the contact areas are wet or dirty, clean
and dry them as much as possible before ac- External surfaces of the exhaust system remain
cessing the back of cab area, and be especially hot after the engine has been shut down. When
careful when climbing or standing on the vehicle. accessing the back of the cab or sleeper, do not
2.7
Vehicle Access
touch any part of the exhaust system other than

the exhaust-mounted grab handle, if equipped, or
severe burns could occur.
1. Facing the center of the deck plate, grasp the
grab handle with both hands. Reach up as far as
is comfortable.
2. Place one foot on the bottom step and pull your-
self up.
3. Place your other foot on the top step.
4. Move your lower hand to a higher position on the
grab handle.
5. Step onto the deck plate.
Exiting the Back-of-Cab Area

1. Face the center of the vehicle and grasp the
grab handle with both hands.
2. Place one foot at a time on the top step.
3. Move your upper hand to a lower position on the
grab handle.
4. Move one foot to the bottom step.
5. Step to the ground with your upper foot first. 05/23/2011 f602457
Opening the Grille Fig. 2.9, Opening the Grille
1
A
CAUTION
Step back from the grille when opening it. The
grille can open quickly and could hit a person,
possibly resulting in personal injury.
Opening the grille allows the driver access to the en-
gine oil dipstick, the coolant fill cap, and the wind-
shield washer reservoir. To open the grille, face the
front of the truck, reach through the latch access
openings on either side of the grille, and release the 1
two latches. See Fig. 2.9. Grip the grille firmly with
both hands and lift. Pull the interior straps down to
pull the grille shut. See Fig. 2.10. 05/23/2011 f602458
Make sure the grille is shut and latched securely. A. Use this strap to close the grille.
1. Grille Latches
NOTE: On some vehicles, the access latches
are located behind the lower corners of the Fig. 2.10, Grille (shown fully open)
grille.
2.8
Vehicle Access
Cab Tilt System ing an accident that could result in personal in-
jury or property damage.
The hydraulic tilt system is used to tilt and lower the The hydraulic tilt system is a cab-tilting, not a
cab. An electric motor is used to activate the hydrau- cab-holding device. Do not leave the vehicle un-
lic tilt pump. The tilt pump can also be operated attended unless the cab is fully tilted or resting
manually if necessary. A pump handle is located in against the safety stop. Holding the cab in place
the baggage compartment for manually working the with the hydraulic tilt system may result in per-
tilt pump. sonal injury or death and/or property damage.
The hydraulic cab latches open automatically when
IMPORTANT: Before tilting or lowering the cab,
the cab is tilted. When the cab is returned to the op-
erating position, the latch hooks lock automatically. read the warning label on the tilt pump and the
An indicator pin on the outboard side of each latch tilt instructions label on the exhaust stack.
protrudes when the latch is unlocked, and recedes
when the latch is locked. See Fig. 2.11. NOTICE
Before tilting the cab, make sure the vehicle is
parked on level ground, both side-to-side and
fore-to-aft. Tilting the cab while the vehicle is
parked on a slope may damage the cab mounts
and prevent you from returning the cab to the
operating position.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, place the
vehicle in neutral, shut down the engine, and set
the parking brake. Chock the tires.
WARNING
Objects falling in the cab or a door flying open
10/19/94 f310441 could damage the vehicle or cause personal in-
jury.
Fig. 2.11, Indicator Pin
2. Secure all loose articles in the cab and bunk,
then activate the tilt system power switch on the
NOTICE dash. See Fig. 2.12.
Do not use either the telescoping tube assembly
or the hydraulic tilt cylinder as a step or hand-
hold; you could damage the transmission, tele-
scoping tube assembly, or the tilt cylinder.
Tilting the Cab

WARNING
Before tilting the cab, make sure there is ad-
equate clearance in front of the vehicle and that 04/24/2012 f611179
the area is free of people and objects.
Fig. 2.12, Cab Tilt Switch
Do not tilt the cab with the engine running. Tilt-
ing the cab could engage the transmission. If the 3. Exit the cab and make sure the doors are fully
engine is running, the vehicle could move, caus- latched.
2.9
Vehicle Access
8. When the cab reaches a 30-degree angle, stop

NOTICE tilting the cab by letting go of the pump button.
Engage the safety stop on the right tilt cylinder
Make sure the grille is open before tilting the cab rod. See Fig. 2.14. The safety stop prevents the
(vehicles built from June 2011). Leaving the grille cab from accidentally dropping below this
closed while tilting the vehicle will cause damage position.
to the grille.
IMPORTANT: Vehicles built February 2012 and
later are equipped with a safety mechanism that
prevents the tilt pump from operating when the
grille is not open.
2
4. Fully open the grille.
5. Check the cab travel path for obstructions.
6. Move the pump control lever to the TILT position.
1
See Fig. 2.13.
2 04/15/93 f310357a
1
1. Tilt Cylinder Rod 2. Safety Stop
Fig. 2.14, Safety Stop Engaged
3 9. To tilt the cab all the way, press and hold the
button on the pump until the cab nears a 45-
degree angle (the balance point). See Fig. 2.15.
Once the cab goes beyond 45 degrees, release
the button on the pump and move the tilt pump
lever to the RETURN position in order to slow
05/07/2012 f602470 cab descent.
1. Pump Control Lever 3. Pump Activation IMPORTANT: If the cab stops after it has gone
2. Hydraulic Tilt Pump Button beyond 45 degrees, dont force it down with the
Fig. 2.13, Cab Tilt Pump tilt pump. The velocity fuses have locked the tilt
cylinders. To unlock them, see Hydraulic
7. Press and hold the button on the pump to disen- Lockup, below.
gage the hold-down latches and begin tilting the
cab. Returning the Cab to Operating
IMPORTANT: Check the indicator pin on each Position
cab latch. The latches have disengaged if the
pins are out. See Fig. 2.11. DANGER
DANGER Stay completely clear of the cabs travel path at
all times. Once the safety stop has been re-
Make sure the safety stop is engaged on the right leased, dont lean over the frame rails, the en-
tilt cylinder rod. If the safety stop isnt engaged, gine, or the transmission for any reason. To do
and the cab should drop, the result could be seri- so could result in serious injury or death.
ous injury or death. 1. Move the pump lever to the RETURN position.
2.10
Vehicle Access
A
1
B
3
04/15/93 f310358a
1. Safety Stop 3. Tilt Cylinder

C 2. Tilt Cylinder Rod
03/27/98 f000896 Fig. 2.16, Safety Stop Disengaged
A. Upright or Operating Position
B. 45 Tilted Position (balance position) 7. Check the indicator pin on each cab latch. The
C. Full-Tilt Position latches are locked when the pins have moved
back into the piston and cylinder spring assem-
Fig. 2.15, Cab Tilt Positions bly.
2. Check the cab travel path for obstructions. NOTE: Maintain the hydraulic oil level at the oil
3. Press and hold the button on the pump to begin fill plug. Add oil only when the cab is in the op-
moving the cab to the operating position. erating position. Use only Freightliner-approved
hydraulic oil. See Group 60 of the Century
NOTE: To slow the cab descent, reverse the tilt Class Trucks Maintenance Manual.
pump lever after the cab passes the balance
point. 8. Close the grille.
4. Allow the cab to lower to the safety stop, then 9. Switch off the tilt system dash switch.
move the safety stop away from the right tilt cyl-
inder rod. See Fig. 2.16. Hydraulic Lockup
5. Press and hold the button on the pump until the Hydraulic lockup can occur for the following reasons:
cab nears a 45-degree angle (the balance point). very cold temperatures
See Fig. 2.15. Once the cab goes beyond 45
degrees, release the button on the pump and use of the wrong hydraulic fluid
move the tilt pump lever to the TILT position in
air in the system
order to slow cab descent.
sudden cab movement
IMPORTANT: If the cab stops after it has gone
beyond 45 degrees, dont force it down with the ruptured hydraulic line
tilt pump. The safety stop is in the locked posi- continued pumping after the cab goes over-
tion or, the velocity fuses have locked the tilt center
cylinders. Release the safety stop or, to unlock
the fuses, see Hydraulic Lockup, below. tilt strut in locked position while lowering the
cab
6. Move the pump lever to the RETURN position.
2.11
Vehicle Access
Any of the above situations will lock the tilt cylinders.

To unlock the cylinders, the cab must be moved in
the opposite direction of travel.
For example, if the cab is moving toward the full-tilt
position when the lockup occurs, move the control
lever to RETURN and work the pump a few strokes
to unlock the cylinders. Move the control lever to the
TILT position and allow the cab to descend to a full-
tilt position.
If the cab is moving toward the lowered (operating)
position when the lockup occurs, move the control
lever to TILT and work the pump a few strokes to
unlock the cylinders. Move the control lever to RE-
TURN and allow the cab to descend to the operating
position.
2.12
3
Electrical System
Circuit Breaker/Relay Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Low Voltage Disconnect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Cab Load Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Battery Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Electrical System
Circuit Breaker/Relay Panel Another sticker is located inside the right-hand door
frame behind the seat, along with the LVD module.
The circuit breaker/relay panel is located in the dash
in front of the passenger seat. To access the com- Cab Load Disconnect Switch
partment, press the button labeled PRESS and lift
the top dash panel. See Fig. 3.1.
WARNING
A Turning the cab load disconnect switch (CLDS) to
the off position does not disconnect the connec-
tion between the battery and the starter. To work
on the vehicle safely, the negative leads must be
disconnected from the battery.
IMPORTANT: The ignition should be turned off
before turning the CLDS to on or off.
The CLDS is used to avoid excessive draw on the
battery when the vehicle is parked for an extended
period of time by disconnecting (or opening) the con-
nection between the battery and the most of the ve-
hicle electrical system. See Fig. 3.2.
The CLDS may be mounted:
05/07/2012 f545897 inside the cab on the outboard side of the
drivers seat;
A. Press the button and lift the top dash panel
at the battery box;
Fig. 3.1, Circuit Breaker/Relay Panel (right-hand drive
shown) outboard on the left frame rail.
Low Voltage Disconnect

Feature
The low voltage disconnect (LVD) feature protects
the batteries from excessive discharge by discon-
necting certain circuits from battery power supply.
This allows the batteries to maintain acceptable
charge to restart the vehicle. The LVD system turns
off cab and sleeper accessories when voltage drops
to 12.3 volts. An alarm sounds for one minute before
accessories are turned off. If no action is taken within
that minute, the LVD module will shut off power to
predetermined cab and sleeper circuits and illuminate 06/19/2007 f545071
an LED indicator on the LVD module located inside
the right-hand door frame behind the seat. These Fig. 3.2, Cab Load Disconnect Switch
circuits will remain off until the LVD measures 13.0
volts on the electrical system, which can be done by
starting the engine. After the engine is started, the
Battery Access
system will reset. NOTE: On vehicles with vertically-mounted muf-
flers, tilt the cab slightly to open the battery box.
All vehicles equipped with LVD should have a sticker
on the dash indicating the presence of the system.
3.1
Electrical System
The batteries are typically located aft wall of the cab/

sleeper compartment. To remove the cover from the
battery box, release the latch and lift the cover.
3.2
4
Instruments
Instrumentation Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Warning and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Driver Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Overhead Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19
Instruments
Instrumentation Control Units Ignition Sequence

The instrumentation control unit (ICU) provides the When the ignition is turned on, the ICU runs a self-
driver with engine and vehicle information. It is com- check. See Fig. 4.4. Observing the ignition sequence
prised of standard and optional gauges, an audible is a good way to ensure the ICU is functioning
warning, a driver message center, and a lightbar con- properly.
taining warning and indicator lamps (also known as
telltales). Warning and indicator lamps illuminate in IMPORTANT: Do not crank the engine until the
red (danger), amber (caution), green (status advi- ICU gauge sweep is complete.
sory), or blue (high-beam headlights activated). NOTE: Air gauges do not complete a sweep of
Argosy vehicles are equipped with either an ICU4M their dials during the ignition sequence.
(Fig. 4.1), ICU3 (Fig. 4.2), or ICU2M (Fig. 4.3). When the ignition is turned on, the following actions
The following headings in this chapter provide addi- should occur:
tional information and operating instructions for ICU electronic gauges complete a full sweep of
components: their dials
"Warning and Indicator Lights" some warning and indicator lamps illuminate,
"Instruments" then are extinguished
"Driver Message Center"
8 8
7
OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
40 60 100 60 100
150 200
CHECK STOP
FASTEN SEATBELTS ABS ABS
OPT
PSI F 0000432 MILES IDLE PSI P PSI S
100 250 !
0 100 0 160 0 160
BRAKE
OIL WATER AIR AIR
1 2 11 12
15 45 55
200 12 35 1/2
10 RPM 20 190 270
F X 100 25 50
70
90 65 F
100 8 E F 110 350

300 16 110 FUEL TRANS
OIL VOLTS 30
5 25 15 75
3 4 10
130
13 14
5 85
0 30 200 200
40 90 MPH km/h
F F
PSI F
10
100 100
0
TURBO
80 30
PYRO
150
9 10 AXLE
300
AXLE
300
5 6 15 16
09/29/2010 f610706b
1. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge 9. Tachometer
2. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 10. Speedometer
3. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge 11. Primary Air Pressure Gauge
4. Battery Voltage Gauge 12. Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
5. Turbo Boost Air Pressure Gauge 13. Fuel Level Gauge
6. Pyrometer 14. Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge
7. Driver Message Center 15. Forward Drive Axle Temperature Gauge
8. Warning and Indicator Lights 16. Rearmost Drive Axle Temperature Gauge
Fig. 4.1, ICU4M Instrument Cluster (typical)
4.1
Instruments
1 2 3 4 5
OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT

50 1/2
CHECK STOP ABS ABS
PSI
BRAKE
0 100 E F
OIL FUEL
150 200
20 25 45 50 100
6
F
15 35 55 PSI
70
100 250
30 25 50
90
65 0 150
WATER
10 30
110 AIR
PUSH
MODE
7
15 75 HOLD
RESET
225 130
12 5 10 50 100
8
F 5 85 PSI
0 RPM km/h
100 350
X100 MPH 0 150
TRANS AIR
10/26/2006 11 10 9 f610837b
1. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge 6. Primary Air Pressure Gauge 10. Tachometer
2. Lightbar 7. Mode/Reset Switch 11. Tranismission Fluid Temperature
3. Headlight High-Beam Indicator 8. Secondary Air Pressure Gauge Gauge
4. Driver Message Center 9. Speedometer 12. Coolant Temperature Gauge
5. Fuel Level Gauge
Fig. 4.2, ICU3 Instrument Cluster
audible alert sounds until sufficient air pressure If the ICU receives active fault codes, it displays
builds up in the primary and secondary air sys- them one after the other until the parking brake is
tems released or the ignition is turned off. Once the park-
ing brake is completely released, the ICU displays
software revision level of the ICU is displayed
the odometer. If there are no active faults, the ICU
on the driver message center, followed by any
displays the odometer after the self-check completes.
active faults
When the self-check is complete on an ICU4M, the
IMPORTANT: If any red or amber warning or fasten seat belt screen displays if the engine is off. If
indicator lamps do not illuminate during the ICU the engine is running, the idle hours screen displays.
self-check or do not extinguish after the self-
check completes, take the action outlined in Audible Alerts
Table 4.1, or take the vehicle to an authorized
Daimler Trucks service facility as soon as pos- An audible alert sounds during the ignition sequence
and whenever one of the following conditions exists:
sible.
Engine oil pressure falls below the minimum
NOTE: If active faults are present, take the ve- preset value.
hicle to an authorized Daimler Trucks service
facility as soon as possible. Coolant temperature rises above the maximum
preset value.
4.2
Instruments
2 3
Door is open or the headlights are on, with the
4 parking brake off.
Warning and Indicator Lights

The ICU lightbar has three or four rows of warning
and indicator lights with icon symbols, depending on
the ICU. The positions of the lights may vary for the
different ICUs, but the telltales are standard for all
applications. See Table 4.1 for a listing of standard
and commonly used warning and indicator lamps.
1
Warning and indicator lamps illuminate in red (dan-
ger), amber (caution), green (status advisory), or
09/27/95 f600991 blue (high-beam headlights active).
1. Main Dash Panel IMPORTANT: Depending upon local jurisdic-
2. Lightbar tional emissions guidelines, vehicles may not be
3. Driver Message Center equipped with all of the lamps shown in
4. Warning and Indicator Lights
Table 4.1.
Fig. 4.3, ICU2M Instrument Cluster (typical)
Engine Protection System
IGNITION SWITCH
TURNED TO ON
WARNING
When the red STOP engine lamp illuminates,
most engines are programmed to shut down au-
tomatically within 30 seconds. The driver must
ICU PERFORMS
SELFTEST
immediately move the vehicle to a safe location
at the side of the road to prevent causing a haz-
ardous situation that could cause bodily injury,
IF NO FAULTS IF FAULT DETECTED
WERE DETECTED property damage, or severe damage to the en-
gine.
APU 190 See Fig. 4.5 for an explanation of the aftertreatment
123456.7
MI system (ATS) warning indicators, and actions re-
12.3 VOLTS
quired to avoid further engine protection steps.
PARKING BRAKE PARKING BRAKE The STOP engine lamp illuminates when the engine
RELEASED RELEASED
protection system is activated in one of two ways. On
123456.7 some engines, the engine protection system will der-
MI ate the engine, allowing it to run at lower rpm and
12.3 VOLTS
slower vehicle speed. Drive the vehicle to a safe lo-
01/18/2012 f040420c
cation or to a service facility.
Fig. 4.4, ICU Self-Check IMPORTANT: Safely bring the vehicle to a stop
Air pressure falls below approximately 70 psi on the side of the road and shut down the en-
(483 kPa). gine as soon as the red light is seen. If the en-
gine shuts down while the vehicle is in a haz-
Parking brake is set with the vehicle moving ardous location, turn the key to the OFF position
faster than two miles per hour. for a few seconds, then restart the engine and
System voltage falls below 12 volts. move the vehicle to a safer location.
4.3
Instruments
Common Warning and Indicator Lamps

Lamp Description Color
Indicates a serious fault that requires engine shutdown
immediately. The engine protection system will reduce the
maximum engine torque and speed, and, if the condition
does not improve, will shut down the engine within 30 to 60
seconds.
STOP STOP Engine* Safely bring the vehicle to a stop on the side of the road
and shut down the engine as soon as the red light is seen.
IMPORTANT: If the engine shuts down while the vehicle
is in a hazardous location, turn the key to the OFF
position for a few seconds, then restart the engine and
move the vehicle to a safer location.
Indicates the coolant temperature is above the maximum

High Coolant Temperature
allowable temperature.
Indicates air pressure in the primary or secondary reservoir

Low Air Pressure Red
is below 70 psi (483 kPa).
Indicates the engine oil pressure is below the minimum

Low Engine Oil Pressure
allowable pressure.
Indicates the parking brake is engaged. An audible alert

Parking Brake activates when the vehicle is moving over 2 mph (3 km/h)
BRAKE
with the parking brake set.
Low Battery Voltage Indicates that battery voltage is 11.9 volts or less.
Activates with an audible alert when the system detects that

the parking brake is off and the driver seat belt is not
Unfastened Seat Belt fastened on some vehicles. On other vehicles, this lamp
illuminates for 15 seconds when the ignition is first turned
on.
Indicates an engine condition (low oil pressure, low coolant
level, high coolant temperature, high DPF soot level, or
CHECK CHECK Engine* uncontrolled DPF regeneration) that requires correction.
Correct the condition as soon as possible. If the condition
worsens, the STOP engine lamp will illuminate.
Slow (10-second) flashing indicates a regeneration (regen)
is in progress. Amber
High Exhaust System IMPORTANT: When the HEST lamp is illuminated, do

Temperature (HEST)* not park the vehicle near flammable material.
Solid illumination indicates high exhaust temperatures at the
outlet of the tail pipe when speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
4.4
Instruments

Solid illumination indicates a regen is required. Change to a
more challenging duty cycle (such as highway driving ) to
Diesel Particulate Filter raise exhaust temperatures for at least twenty minutes, or
(DPF) Status perform a parked regen.
Blinking indicates that a parked regen is required
immediately. An engine derate and shutdown will occur.
Malfunction Indicator Indicates an emissions-related fault. See the engine

Lamp (MIL) operation manual for details.
Momentary illumination indicates the vehicle ABS is

engaged.
Vehicle ABS Solid illumination indicates a problem with the vehicle ABS.
Repair the ABS immediately to ensure full braking
capability.
Momentary illumination indicates the trailer ABS is engaged.
Trailer ABS Solid illumination indicates a problem with the trailer ABS.
Repair the ABS immediately to ensure full braking
capability.
NO Indicates the alternator is not properly powering the Amber

CHARGE No Charge
electrical system.
Indicates the fuel may contain water. Drain any water

Water in Fuel
collected in the fuel/water separators.
Fuel Filter Restriction Indicates the fuel filter is clogged and requires service.
Check Transmission Indicates an undesirable transmission condition.
Transmission Overheat Indicates high transmission temperature.
Flashing indicates the ATC system is active, or the ATC

button has been pressed to allow wheel slip.
WHEEL
SPIN Wheel Spin Solid illumination indicates a problem with the ATC system.
Repair the ATC system immediately to ensure full braking
capability.
Engine Brake Indicates the engine brake is enabled.
Green
Flashing indicates the outside left-turn signal lights are
Left-Turn Signal
activated.
4.5
Instruments

Flashing indicates the outside right-turn signal lights are

Right-Turn Signal Green
activated.
High-Beam Headlights Indicates the high-beam headlights are on. Blue
* See Fig. 4.5 for an explanation of the aftertreatment system (ATS) warning indicators, and actions required to avoid further engine protection steps.
Table 4.1, Common Warning and Indicator Lamps
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION

INDICATOR WARNING
CHECK STOP
LAMP(S)
(Solid) (Flashing) (Flashing)
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Indicator Lamp Filter Regeneration Filter Parked Regeneration Service Regeneration Required. HEST (High Exhaust
Message(s) Recommended. Regeneration Required Engine Engine Derate To Idle Only. System Temperature)
Necessary Derate
Diesel Particulate Filter is reaching Filter is now Filter has reached Filter has exceeded maximum Flashing
Filter Condition capacity. reaching maximum maximum capacity. capacity. A regeneration is in
Switch.
capacity. progress.
Required Action Bring vehicle to To avoid engine Vehicle must be Vehicle must be parked, and a
highway speeds to derate, bring vehicle parked, and a Parked Service Regeneration must be Solid
allow for an to highway speeds Regeneration must performed. Check engine Exhaust components
Automatic to allow for an be performed. operators manual for details. and exhaust gas are at
Regeneration or Automatic Engine will begin Engine will shut down. high temperature. When
perform a Parked Regeneration, or derate. stationary, keep away
Regeneration. perform a Parked from people and
Regeneration as flammable materials or
soon as possible. vapors.
For a driver performed Parked Regeneration, vehicle must be equipped with a dash mounted Regeneration Switch.
02/20/2009 f080156
Fig. 4.5, ATS Warning Lamps
On other engines, the engine protection system will IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to restart the en-
shut down the engine. It will first derate the engine, gine while the vehicle is moving. Bring the ve-
then shut it down completely 30 to 60 seconds after hicle to a safe stop, then restart the engine.
the indicator illuminates (depending on the critical
fault type) if the condition does not improve. Bring To restart the engine, turn the ignition switch to OFF
the vehicle to a stop on the side of the road before for a few seconds, then turn the ignition switch to ON
the engine shuts down. and let the gauge sweep complete before starting the
engine. The engine will run for a short period and
Some vehicles may have a shutdown-override shut down again if the condition does not improve.
switch, which may be used to momentarily override
the shutdown sequence. See Chapter 10 for detailed
information regarding the shutdown process.
4.6
Instruments
Instruments Vehicles may be equipped with a go/no-go restriction

indicator without graduations (see Fig. 4.7) instead of
Standard instruments are present on every vehicle. a graduated indicator.
Optional instruments, typically located on the auxil-
iary dash panel or right-hand control panel, are not Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values (inH2O)
found on every vehicle. Instruments are listed here in Pre-EPA07 (ADR EPA07 (ADR 80/
Engine Make
alphabetical order to make the information easier to 80/02) Engines 03) Engines
find. Cummins 25 25
Detroit 20 22
Air Intake Restriction Gauge Mercedes-Benz 22 22
The air intake restriction gauge indicates the vacuum Table 4.2, Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values
on the engine side of the air cleaner. On standard
installations, it is mounted on the air cleaner. As an
option for easier viewing, an air intake restriction indi-
cator (see Fig. 4.6) can be mounted on the auxiliary
dash panel.
04/08/2005 f090431
Fig. 4.7, Manual-Reset Air Restriction Indicator, Go/

No-Go
If air restriction exceeds the maximum allowable

value, operate the vehicle for one more day, making
sure not to run the engine over rated rpm. Refer to
the engine operation manual for more information on
rated rpm for your engine.
If air restriction exceeds the maximum value again,
10/10/2001 f610568
replace the air cleaner. For instructions, refer to
Fig. 4.6, Air Intake Restriction Indicator Group 09 of the Century Class Trucks Workshop
Manual.
NOTE: Rain or snow can wet the filter and
cause a temporary high reading. Application Air Pressure Gauge
Air intake restriction vacuum is measured in inches An application air pressure gauge registers the air
of water (inH2O). For vehicles equipped with a pressure being used to apply the brakes, and should
graduated indicator or a restriction gauge on the be used for reference only. The gauge will not regis-
dash, check the gauge with the engine off. If the yel- ter air pressure until the foot brake pedal is de-
low signal stays locked in the red zone once the en- pressed or the trailer hand brake is applied.
gine is shut down, or is at or above the values
shown in Table 4.2, the air cleaner element needs to
be replaced.
4.7
Instruments
Coolant Temperature Gauge Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
NOTICE the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
creases, there is no problem.
A sudden increase in coolant temperature may
indicate engine or cooling system failure. Bring Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
the vehicle to a safe stop and investigate the
cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate
the engine until the cause has been determined NOTICE
and corrected.
A sudden decrease or absence of oil pressure
During normal engine operation, the coolant tem- may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle
perature gauge should read 175 to 195F (79 to to a safe stop and investigate the cause to pre-
91C). If the temperature remains below 160F vent further damage. Do not operate the engine
(71C), inspect the cooling system to determine the until the cause has been determined and cor-
cause. rected.
If coolant temperature rises above the maximum The engine oil pressure gauge displays the current
temperature listed in Table 4.3, the CHECK engine engine oil pressure. If engine oil pressure falls below
lamp will illuminate. If the condition does not im- the minimum levels shown in Table 4.4, the CHECK
prove, the STOP engine lamp will also illuminate and engine lamp will illuminate. If the condition does not
an audible warning will sound. The engine will then improve, the STOP engine lamp will also illuminate
derate or shut down, depending on the type of en- and an audible warning will sound. The engine will
gine protection system installed. then derate or shut down, depending on the type of
engine protection system installed.
Maximum Coolant Temperature
Engine Make Temperature: F (C) Minimum Oil Pressure*
Cummins 225 (107) At Idle Speed: At Rated RPM:
Detroit 215 (101) Engine Model
psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
Mercedes-Benz 221 (105) Cummins 15 (103) 35 (241)
Table 4.3, Maximum Coolant Temperature Detroit 14 (97) 55 (350)
Mercedes-Benz 7 (50) 36 (250)
* Oil pressures are given with the engine at operating temperature. With
Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauges the engine cold, oil pressure may be higher. Individual engines may vary
from the listed pressures; observe and record pressures when the engine
is new to create a guide for checking engine condition.
NOTICE Table 4.4, Minimum Engine Oil Pressure
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not

caused by a load increase may indicate mechani- Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage. NOTICE
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause has
been determined and corrected. A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
During normal operation, drive axle oil temperature caused by a load increase may indicate mechani-
gauges should read as follows: cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
160 to 220F (71 to 104C) for Detroit and Do not operate the engine until the cause has
Meritor drive axles been determined and corrected.
180 to 200F (82 to 93C) for Dana Spicer During normal operation, the optional engine oil tem-
drive axles perature gauge should read:
4.8
Instruments
200 to 260F (93 to 126C) for Detroit and Tachometer

Cummins engines
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions
177 to 203F (81 to 95C) for Mercedes-Benz per minute (rpm) and serves as a guide for shifting
engines the transmission and keeping the engine in the ap-
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep propriate rpm range. For low idle and rated rpm, see
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem- the engine identification plate.
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
the temperature returns to normal when the load de- Transmission Fluid Temperature
creases, there is no problem. Gauge
Fuel Gauge The transmission fluid temperature gauge indicates
the transmission lubricant operating temperature.
The fuel gauge indicates the level of fuel in the fuel Temperatures vary by application, but the transmis-
tank(s). A single fuel gauge is standard. If equipped sion fluid temperature gauge reading should not ex-
with an optional second fuel tank, each fuel tank ceed 250F (121C).
level is indicated on a separate gauge.
Primary and Secondary Air Pressure NOTICE

Gauges A sudden increase in transmission fluid tempera-
ture that is not caused by a load increase may
WARNING indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a
safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent
If air pressure falls below minimum pressure, the further damage. Do not operate the vehicle until
braking ability of the vehicle will be limited. Slow the cause has been determined and corrected.
the vehicle down and bring it to a gradual stop. Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
Do not attempt to move the vehicle until air pres- grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
sure has risen above the minimum level. Moving perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
a vehicle without adequate braking power could the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
cause an accident resulting in property damage, creases, there is no problem.
personal injury, or death.
Air pressure gauges register the pressure in the pri- Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge
mary and secondary air systems. Normal pressure, A turbocharger boost pressure gauge indicates the
with the engine running, is 100 to 120 psi (689 to pressure in the intake manifold, in excess of atmos-
827 kPa) in both systems. pheric pressure, being created by the turbocharger.
A low-air-pressure warning light and audible alert,
connected to both the primary and secondary sys- Voltmeter
tems, activate when air pressure in either system
drops below 64 to 76 psi (441 to 524 kPa). The voltmeter indicates the vehicle charging system
voltage when the engine is running and the battery
When the engine is started, the warning light and voltage when the engine is off. By monitoring the
audible warning remain on until air pressure in both voltmeter, the driver can stay aware of potential bat-
systems exceeds minimum pressure. tery charging problems and have them fixed before
the batteries discharge enough to create starting diffi-
Speedometer culties. Argosy vehicles are equipped with either a
Two speedometer options are available. The U.S. voltmeter gauge, or a digital voltmeter readout lo-
version of the speedometer registers speed in both cated on the bottom line of the dash message center.
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h), The voltmeter will normally show approximately 13.7
with mph in larger numbers. The metric version of to 14.1 volts when the engine is running. The voltage
the speedometer face reverses this arrangement, of a fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts when
with km/h in larger numbers. the engine is off. Battery voltage under 12.0 volts is
4.9
Instruments
considered a low battery, and a completely dis- A flashing alert message that appears on the
charged battery will produce only about 11.0 volts. driver message center in low engine oil pres-
sure or high coolant temperature conditions.
If the voltmeter shows an undercharged or over-
charged condition for an extended period, have the With the parking brake off, only the odometer and
charging system and batteries checked at an autho- alert screens will display. Park the vehicle and set
rized Freightliner service facility. the parking brake to access additional screens.
On a vehicle equipped with a battery isolator system, The dash message center displays alert screens
the voltmeter measures the average voltage of all the when certain conditions occur. They are warnings,
batteries when the engine is running. When the en- cautions, or other messages that require the drivers
gine is off, the voltmeter shows only the isolated bat- attention, but not all of them are critical to the opera-
tery voltage and does not indicate the voltage of the tion of the vehicle. Warning messages always display
engine-starting batteries. at full brightness.
More important messages take priority over less im-
Driver Message Center portant messages. The order of priority is:
The dash message centers for the following instru- 1. parking brake set (with the vehicle moving)
ment clusters are described below:
2. parking brake off (with the door open)
ICU4M
3. low oil pressure or high coolant temperature
ICU3
4. hard brake warnings (if equipped with roll stabil-
ICU2M ity advisor)
ICU4M 5. low battery voltage
Functions 6. turn signal on

7. service warnings
A keypad located on the auxiliary dash panel controls
the driver message center. See Fig. 4.8. 8. no datalink activity
Alert Screens
NOTE: If there is more than one alert message
to display, tap any key to access the next mes-
General Keys Control Keys
sage, and so on, until all the messages have
Dedicated Keys
been viewed.
08/08/96 f601009
To reset a value, press the SET/RESET button twice. Parking Brake On

Fig. 4.8, ICU4M/ICU2M Keypad This warning message and an audible warning come
on whenever the parking brake is applied and the
Main features of the ICU4M include: vehicle is moving faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). The
Gauges that sweep 270 degrees and have screen and audible warning go away only when the
pointers lit by an LED. parking brake is released, or speed is reduced below
2 mph.
Service intervals that are programmable via
two dash-mounted switches. Low Oil Pressure
An audible warning and alert message to warn This warning message and an audible warning come
the driver if the door is opened without first set- on whenever the oil pressure falls below the mini-
ting the parking brake. mum oil pressure, whether the vehicle is idling or in
motion. Tap any key to dismiss the message.
4.10
Instruments
If the fault is still active 30 seconds after the mes- Mobile Screens
sage is dismissed, the warning message will come
on again. The following screens are available when the parking
brake is off (when the vehicle is mobile).
High Coolant Temp i. Fasten seat belt (rpm<100)
This message and an audible warning come on ii. Fuel economy (rpm>100)
whenever the engine coolant temperature exceeds
the maximum allowable temperature. iii. Odometer
If the fault is still active 30 seconds after the mes- iv. Trip distance/hours
sage is dismissed, the warning message will come
v. Trip advisory
on again.
vi. Leg distance/hours
Low Voltage
vii. Leg advisory
On some vehicles, this optional message and an au-
dible warning come on whenever the ICU detects a viii. Outside air temperature
low voltage condition. ix. Fuel used/average MPG (KM/L)
Turn Signal On Stationary Screens
This warning message and audible warning come on
whenever the turn signal remains on for four minutes NOTE: Metric unit screens are similar. AMT=
or five miles of travel. Current gear information for automated manual
transmissions.
To dismiss this message, either turn off the turn sig-
nal or tap any key. The following screens are available when the parking
brake is on (when the vehicle is stationary).
Service Warnings i. Odometer
Service warning screens display during the ignition
ii. Trip information including trip miles/hours, idle
sequence and indicate that a service interval has
hours, average speed, leg miles/hours
been reached or exceeded and maintenance is re-
quired. The messages may indicate the number of iii. Fuel information including fuel used, fuel
miles (KM) or hours until the next required service or, economy, idle/PTO fuel usage
once passed, the number of miles (KM) or hours ago
that maintenance should have been performed. iv. Engine information including engine miles/hours,
engine/PTO gallons, oil level
Automated Transmission Display v. Diagnostic information
The ICU4M can display current gear information for vi. Service information including mileage or time to
vehicles with an automated transmission. The last next service
three digits at the far right on the lower line of the
driver display screen are reserved for this informa- vii. Setup information
tion. viii. Vehicle information including Datalink status, ICU
If there is a request to shift, an up or down arrow is serial number, software version
also displayed, depending on the shift direction. ix. Fasten seat belt warning
On vehicles with conventional manual or automatic
transmissions, the gear and shift direction are not Trip Information
displayed. For more information about specific When idle hours are displayed, tap the any key to
models of automated transmissions, see Chapter 8. access the main trip information screen. See
Fig. 4.9. Tap the arrow keys on the 10-key keypad to
advance through the screens. Press and hold the
SET/RESET key to reset any of the screens.
4.11
Instruments
FASTEN SEATBELTS
123456.7 MILES AMT
Engine Idling Press Right Arrow Key and Set the Parking Brake
(100 RPM or more)
IDLE HOURS 1234:56

12.3GAL123456.7MI AMT
TRIP TRIP MILES 123456.7 IDLE HOURS 1234:56 LEG MILES 123456.7
INFORMATION AMT TRIP HR 1234:56 AMT AVG MPH 12.3 AMT LEG HR 1234:56 AMT
R R R
12/01/2004 Go to Fuel Information Screens f040699
Fig. 4.9, ICU4M Trip Information Screens
Fuel Information Press and hold the SET/RESET key to reset any of
the screens.
Fuel information allows you to view total fuel usage
since the last reset, fuel mileage, and fuel consumed Diagnostic Information
while idling or running the PTO. See Fig. 4.10. Tap
the arrow keys on the 10-key keypad to advance If active fault codes are displayed on the diagnostic
through the screens. Press and hold the SET/RESET information screens, make a note of the fault code
key to reset any of the screens. and text message, then take the vehicle to an autho-
rized Freightliner service facility as soon as possible.
Engine Information See Fig. 4.12 for a diagram of the diagnostic infor-
mation screens.
The engine information screens allow you to view
engine mileage and hours, and total fuel consump-
tion. See Fig. 4.11. Tap the arrow keys on the 10-key
keypad to advance through the screens.
Return to
Idle Hours From Trip
Screen Information
FUEL FUEL USED 12345.6 IDLE GALLONS 12.3

INFORMATION AMT AVG MPG 12.34 AMT PTO GAL 12345.6 AMT
R R
Go to Engine Information Screens

12/17/2004 f040700
Fig. 4.10, ICU4M Fuel Information Screens
4.12
Instruments
Return to
Idle Hours From Fuel
Screen Information
ENGINE ENG MILES 123456.7 ENG GALLONS 123456.7 ENG OIL LEVEL
INFORMATION AMT ENG HOUR1234:78AMT PTO GAL 12345.6 AMT LO 1 QTS AMT
ENG OIL LEVEL

If Oil Level Low
LO 1 QTS AMT
ENG OIL LEVEL

Go to Diagnostic Information Screens If Oil Level OK
OK AMT
ENG OIL LEVEL

If Oil Level High
HI 1 QTS AMT
12/01/2004 f040701
Fig. 4.11, ICU4M Engine Information Screens
Return to
Idle Hours From Engine
Screen Information
Fault # 1 Fault # n
DIAGNOSTIC ACTIVE FAULTS MID(text) PID/SID(text) MID(text) PID/SID(text)
INFORMATION AMT 12 or NONE AMT FMI(text) MID#sPID#FMI#AMT FMI(text) MID#sPID#FMI#AMT
Hist Fault # 1 Hist Fault # n

12 HIST DASH FAULTS MID(text) PID/SID(text) MID(text) PID/SID(text)
LAST CLR 123456.7AMT FMI(text) MID#sPID#FMI#AMT FMI(text) MID#sPID#FMI#AMT
LAST OCCUR 123456.7 LAST OCCUR 123456.7

1234 TIMES AMT 1234 TIMES AMT
FIRST OCCUR 123456.7 FIRST OCCUR 123456.7

1234 TIMES AMT 1234 TIMES AMT
2 PUSH RESET TO
CLEAR DASH FAULTS AMT
R
ALL FAULTS
CLEARED AMT
12/17/2004 Go to Service Information Screens f040702
Fig. 4.12, ICU4M Diagnostic Information Screens
Service Information For programming service intervals, see Setup Infor-

mation, below.
Service information allows you to view the next re-
curring service interval, expressed in either miles or NOTE: If the vehicle has gone past the service
hours. See Fig. 4.13. Service intervals can also be interval, the miles (km)/hours remaining
deactivated, so they do not display at all. screen is replaced by the service was due
4.13
Instruments
Return to
Idle Hours From Diagnostic
Screen Information
Distance prior to reaching the Distance traveled beyond the

set Service Interval set Service Interval
SERVICE INTERVAL IS SET TO 12345 MILES SERVICE WAS DUE
INFORMATION AMT XXXXX MILES AMT TO NEXT SERVICE AMT OR 12345 MILES AGO AMT
R R
Go to Setup Information Screens

Time prior to reaching the Time accumulated beyond the
set Service Interval set Service Interval
SERVICE INTERVAL IS SET TO 1234 HOURS SERVICE WAS DUE
INFORMATION AMT XXXX HOURS AMT TO NEXT SERVICE AMT OR 1234 HOURS AGO AMT
R R
Go to Setup Information Screens

12/17/2004 f040703
NOTE: Service information screens only appear if the service interval is set to MILES or HOURS in Setup Information.
Fig. 4.13, ICU4M Service Information Screens
screen, followed by the number of miles(km)/ ICU3

hours since the service was due.
A mode/reset button, located on the right side of the
Setup Information ICU instrument cluster, is used to control the driver
message center. See Fig. 4.2. Tap the mode/reset
See Fig. 4.14 and Fig. 4.15 for diagrams of the button to advance one screen; press and hold the
setup information screens. button to select a menu choice or reset the display.
Setup information allows you to program various fea- When the display resets, an audible chirp sounds.
tures of the ICU4M environment, including: Only four screens are accessible when the parking
A. Service intervals (OFF/MILES/HOURS); brake is off (mobile screens). All screens are acces-
sible when the parking brake is on (stationary
B. Target MPG; screens).
C. LCD Lamp (ON/OFF);
Mobile Screens
D. Driver message center brightness;
The following screens are available when the parking
E. Language (English/French/Spanish); brake is off (when the vehicle is mobile) and no ac-
F. Units of measurement (English/Metric); tive fault codes are found. Tap the mode/reset button
to scroll through the mobile screens.
G. Driver select (ON/OFF)
i. Odometer
H. Reset parameters to original settings.
ii. Trip distance
Vehicle Information Screens iii. Trip hours
The vehicle information screens display hardware iv. Back to odometer
and software information, including the Freightliner
part number and switch ID of the ICU. See Fig. 4.16. Stationary Screens
brake is on (when the vehicle is stationary) and no
4.14
Instruments
PUSH SET KEY TO SERVICE INTERVAL

S
CHANGE SERVICE AMT OFF/ MILES/HOURS AMT
Return to
Idle Hours From Service
Screen Information If Service Interval is set to MILES
PUSH SET KEY TO INTERVAL XXXXX MILES
S
CHANGE SERVICE MI AMT <LESS MORE> AMT
SETUP
INFORMATION AMT
OR
SERVICE INTERVAL
S
OFF/ MILES /HOURS AMT
If Service Interval is set to HOURS
Go to Vehicle Information Screens PUSH SET KEY TO INTERVAL XXXX HOURS

S
CHANGE SERVICE HR AMT <LESS MORE> AMT
To more Setup Information

12/17/2004 f040704
Fig. 4.14, ICU4M Setup Information Screens (for service intervals)
Go to Setup Information Screens i. Odometer

PUSH SET KEY TO
S
TARGET MPG: 12.3 ii. Trip distance
CHANGE TARGET MPG AMT <LESS MORE>AMT
iii. Trip hours

PUSH SET KEY TO
S
LCD LAMP iv. Select units
CHANGE LCD LAMP AMT <OFF ON > AMT
v. Diagnostics
PUSH SET KEY TO
S
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS vi. Clear screen (on vehicles with less than 255
CHANGE BRIGHTNESS AMT <DARK LIGHT>AMT
miles on the odometer)
vii. Engine miles
PUSH SET KEY TO LANGUAGE: ENGLISH
CHANGE LANGUAGE AMT S FRENCH/SPANISH AMT
viii. Engine hours
ix. Engine oil level
PUSH SET KEY TO UNITS
CHANGE UNITS AMT S ENGLISH / METRIC AMT
x. Setup
xi. Back to odometer
PUSH SET KEY TO RESET PARAMETERS
CHANGE PARAMETERS AMT S < YES NO> AMT
Trip Distance
Go to Vehicle Information Screens
When the odometer reading is displayed, tap the
12/17/2004 f040705 mode/reset button once for trip distance. Press and
hold the mode/reset button to reset trip miles to zero.
Fig. 4.15, Other Setup Information
active fault codes are found. Tap the mode/reset but- Trip Hours
ton to scroll through the stationary screens. See When trip distance is displayed, tap the mode/reset
Fig. 4.17. button once for trip hours. Press and hold the mode/
reset button to reset trip hours to zero.
4.15
Instruments
Return to
Idle Hours From Setup
Screen Information
VEHICLE DATALINK ACTIVE DATA LINK STATUS DASH# XXXXXXXXXXX

INFORMATION AMT AMT USAGE 12% ERR1%AMT SW# P1.2.3 AMT
Return to Trip Information Screens

01/11/2005 f040706
Fig. 4.16, ICU4M Vehicle Information Screens
123456.7
Default Odometer CLEAr
MI Hold Clear Defaults
12.3 VOLTS Dispay Screen
Push Push
123456.7 123456.7
TRIP MI Hold MI To Dispay Total Engine Miles
To Reset Trip Miles
12.3 VOLTS EC EC = Engine Control
Push Push
123456.7 123456.7
TRIP HOURS Hold To Reset Trip Hours HOURS To Dispay Total Engine Hours
12.3 VOLTS EC EC = Engine Control
Push Push
SELECt To Toggle between Units EnG oIL

Hold Hold Dispay Oil Level
MI MI<>KM *Lo
*Lo = Oil Level Low
HI = Oil Level High
Push Push Blank = Oil Level OK
= No Message
dIAG SEtUP
MI HOURS Hold **MI **HOURS Hold Dispay Service Interval
Dispay Diagnostics
n **no Cycle Screens
n = Number of Active Fault Codes **MI = CYCLE Miles Active Mode
MI = CYCLE Miles Enabled **HOURS = CYCLE Hours Active Mode
Push HOURS = Cycle Hours Enabled Push **no = Service CYCLE Inactive
03/26/2004 f040636a
Note: The engine oil level screen displays for Mercedes-Benz engines only (if equipped and enabled).
Fig. 4.17, ICU3 Stationary Screens
Diagnostic Information Trained technicians use the diagnostic screens to

retrieve fault codes and other diagnostic information
When the DIAG screen is displayed, press and hold
pertaining to the vehicle. If active fault codes display
the mode/reset button to access the various diagnos- during start-up or at any other time, make a note of
tic screens.
4.16
Instruments
the fault code and take the vehicle to an authorized Alert Screens
Freightliner service facility as soon as possible.
Alert screens can appear at any time, even when the
If fault codes are displayed, press and hold the vehicle is moving. They override the regular screen
mode/reset button to view the next fault code until display. They are warnings, cautions, or other mes-
reaching the DIAG screen. sages that require the drivers attention, but not all of
If service intervals are enabled and service distance them are critical to the operation of the vehicle. The
or time has been exceeded, the text SERVICE word Warning or Alert sometimes flashes on the
HOUR/MI (KM) will display at start-up to indicate ve- display screen above the alert text. More important
hicle service is required. messages take priority over less important mes-
sages.
Engine Information NOTE: If there is more than one alert message
When the DIAG screen is displayed, tap the mode/ to display, press any button to scroll to the next
reset button once to access the engine miles/hours message, and so on until all the messages have
screen. When the engine miles/hours screen is dis- been viewed.
played, press and hold the mode/reset button to ac-
cess the engines screen sub-menu. Parking Brake On
Setup Information This warning message and an audible warning come
on whenever the parking brake is applied and the
The setup screen allows the driver to manage ICU vehicle is moving faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). The
parameters. When the engine hours/miles screen is screen and audible warning go away only when the
displayed, tap the mode/reset button to access the parking brake is released, or speed is reduced below
setup screen. The setup screen submenu allows the 2 mph (3 km/h).
driver to enable and change service intervals.
For each parameter, press and hold the mode/reset Low Oil Pressure
button to navigate to the parameter change screen. NOTE: All alert screens follow Low Oil Pressure
In each change screen, tap the mode/reset button to alert format.
toggle between options.
This warning message and an audible warning come
When the setup screen is displayed again, tap the on whenever the oil pressure falls below the mini-
mode/reset button to view the odometer. mum oil pressure, whether the vehicle is idling or in
motion. See Fig. 4.18. To dismiss the message,
ICU2M press any button on the keypad.
A keypad located on the auxiliary dash panel controls If low oil pressure is detected during the ignition se-
the driver message center. See Fig. 4.8. The 10-key quence, it displays as an active fault and the alert
keypad is used to: screen does not appear. After 30 seconds, this mes-
call up information on mobile screens; sage displays again.
navigate from screen to screen; Low Coolant Level

set up the display; This warning message and audible warning activate
whenever the coolant level falls below a preset point.
record significant data.
The odometer is a seven-digit display with one deci- High Coolant Temp
mal point after the sixth digit, allowing it to display This message and an audible warning come on
tenths of miles (or kilometers). When first installed, whenever the engine coolant temperature exceeds
the odometer starts at 0.0 miles (or kilometers). the maximum allowable temperature.
When replaced, the odometer starts again from 0.0.
If high coolant temperature is detected during the
ignition sequence, it displays as an active fault and
4.17
Instruments
Low Fuel Level

NORMAL OPERATION
The ICU continuously monitors fuel level. When the
SCREEN fuel level drops to 1/8th full, the word Warning
flashes on the message display screen above the
INITIAL
low fuel alert.
WARNING RETURN TO
NORMAL
OPERATION
Turn Signal On
WARNING BLINKING
This message (the audible warning is optional) ap-
LOW OIL PRESSURE WARNING pears whenever the turn signal remains on beyond a
preset time or distance traveled.
PRESS ANY KEY
To dismiss this message, either turn off the turn sig-
nal or press any button on the keypad.
08/17/95 f040307
Service Warnings
NOTE: All Alert Screens follow this format. Service warning screens display during the ignition
sequence and indicate that a service interval has
Fig. 4.18, ICU2M Alert Screen: Low Oil Pressure been reached or exceeded and maintenance is re-
quired. The messages may indicate the number of
the alert screen does not appear. After 30 seconds,
miles (KM) or hours until the next required service or,
this message displays again.
once passed, the number of miles (KM) or hours ago
that maintenance should have been performed. The
Low Voltage ICU2M can be programmed using ServiceLink to
On some vehicles, this optional message and an au- generate service warnings in either miles or hours,
dible warning come on whenever the ICU detects a but not both.
low voltage condition.
No Datalink Activity
Faulty Speedo Gauge This message appears whenever the datalink is not
This message is displayed when the system detects receiving data. If the condition persists, take the ve-
a faulty speedometer. This becomes the default hicle in for service as soon as possible to discover
screen, and vehicle speed is displayed as a digital the cause of the problem.
readout at the bottom left of the screen. All other
screens and functions operate normally. Mobile Screens
Recirc Mode Engaged/Provide Fresh Air The following screens are available when the parking
brake is off (when the vehicle is mobile) and no ac-
The Recirc Mode Engaged message appears when- tive fault codes are found. Press the appropriate but-
ever recirculated air is selected on the fresh/air recir- ton on the keypad to display one of the mobile
culation switch or the air circulation switch is rotated screens.
to the maximum air conditioning position. It displays
one time only for seven seconds. It notifies the driver trip miles and hours
that recirculated air is being used and that fresh air fuel used and average MPG
needs to be provided after 20 minutes.
leg miles and hours
If fresh air is not provided after 20 minutes, Provide
Fresh Air is displayed. It displays for seven seconds NOTE: Resetting trip miles and hours also re-
approximately every four minutes until the driver se- sets leg miles and hours.
lects fresh air on the fresh/air recirculation switch or
rotates the air circulation switch away from maximum To reset a mobile screen, push the Set/Reset button
air conditioning. See Chapter 4 for detailed operating twice within a 6-second period while the screen is
instructions for the heater/air conditioner. displayed. A confirmation screen will display after you
press the button once.
4.18
Instruments
NOTE: If the memory in the data logger is full, iii. Engine information: engine miles and hours, en-
the screen will display Memory Full Data Not gine gallons and PTO gallons
Recorded. If the data logger is not connected iv. Diagnostic information: active faults, historical
or not responding, the screen will display Data dash faults
Recorder Not Responding. If the EVENT but-
v. Setup Information: target MPG, brightness, lan-
ton was pressed within the last two minutes, the
guage, units of measurement
screen will display Still Recording Last Event.
vi. Vehicle information: datalink activity/status, ICU
Stationary Screens part number, software ID number
brake is applied (vehicle is stationary) and no active Overhead Instrument Panel
fault codes are found. Each set of stationary screens
The optional overhead instrument panel may hold a
has a title screen followed by one or more data
citizens band (C/B) radio, digital clock, storage
screens.
pocket areas for sunglasses and maps, and a locked
To move forward and backward through these glove box.
screens, use the three arrow buttons on the keypad.
The underside of the overhead console also holds
See Fig. 4.19, Fig. 4.20, and Fig. 4.21 for stationary
screen navigation. the sun visors and the optional dome/reading light
assembly. See Chapter 5 for more information on
i. Trip Information: miles, hours the dome/reading light assembly.
ii. Fuel information: fuel used, average MPG
IDLE HOURS 1234.56

12.3 GAL 1234567 MI
FASTEN SEATBELTS
1234567 MILES See applicable Figure for trip and fuel information.
IGNITION
ON ONLY
IDLING ENGINE ENG MILES 1234567.8 ENG GALLONS 123456.7
INFORMATION ENG HOURS 123456:78 PTO GALLONS 123456.7
For each fault, display fault codes and description.

DIAGNOSTIC ACTIVE FAULTS
FIRST SECOND LAST
INFORMATION 1234 or NONE
For each fault, display fault codes and description.

123 HIST DASH FAULTS PUSH RESET TO
FIRST LAST
LAST CLEAR 1234567 CLEAR DASH FAULTS
R
LAST OCCR LAST OCCR
FIRST OCCR FIRST OCCR
R =RESET (PUSH RESET/SET KEY TWICE)
02/13/96 See applicable Figure. S =SET (PUSH RESET/SET KEY ONCE) f040325
Fig. 4.19, ICU2M Engine Information and Diagnostic Information
4.19
Instruments
See
applicable SETUP PUSH SET KEY TO
S
TARGET MPG 7.0
Figure. INFORMATION CHANGE TARGET MPG <LESS MORE>
S
PUSH SET KEY TO DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

S
CHANGE BRIGHTNESS <LIGHT DARK>
S
CURRENT LANGUAGE
IS FLASHING
PUSH SET KEY TO LANGUAGE ENGLISH

S FRENCH SPANISH
CHANGE LANGUAGE
S
CURRENT UNITS
IS FLASHING
PUSH SET KEY TO UNITS

S ENGLISH METRIC
CHANGE UNITS
S
VEHICLE DATA LINK ACTIVE DATA LINK STATUS DASH # A06XXXXXXXX

INFORMATION USAGE 40% ERROR 6% SW# 7.3.9

To trip information
S =SET (PUSH RESET/SET KEY ONCE)
01/29/98 See applicable Figure. f040326a
Fig. 4.20, ICU2M Setup Information and Vehicle Information
4.20
Instruments
IDLE HOURS 1234:56

12.3 GAL 1234567 MI
FASTEN SEATBELTS
1234567 MILES
IGNITION
ON ONLY
IDLING TRIP TRIP MILES 123456.7 IDLE HOURS 1234:56 LEG MILES 123456.7
INFORMATION TRIP HOURS 1234:56 AVERAGE MPH 12.3 LEG HOURS 1234:56
R R R
FUEL FUEL USED 12345.6 IDLE GALLONS 12345.6

INFORMATION AVERAGE MPG 12.34 PTO GALLONS 12345.6
R R
ENGINE ENG MILES 1234567.8 ENG GALLONS 123456.7

INFORMATION ENG HOURS 123456:78 PTO GALLONS 123456.7

S =SET (PUSH RESET/SET KEY ONCE)
01/28/98 See applicable figure f040324a
Fig. 4.21, ICU2M Trip Information, Fuel Information, and Engine Information
4.21
5
Driver Controls
Ignition Switch and Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Horn Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Suspension/Trailer Connection Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Adjustable Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Driver Controls
Ignition Switch and Key CB radio

power mirrors
The ignition switch has four positions: OFF, ACC (ac-
cessory), ON, and START. See Fig. 5.1. The ignition power receptacle
key also locks and unlocks the cab doors, baggage
fuel heater
door(s), and if equipped, the bunk door(s).
electric oil pan heater
electric or diesel-fired engine coolant pre-
heater
Turn the key counterclockwise to reach the ACC po-
sition. In addition to all the functions that are oper-
able in the OFF position, the following functions are
operable when the switch is in the ACC position:
radio/stereo system
heater and A/C fan
mirror defog
windshield fan
07/19/2006 f610805
ether start system
Fig. 5.1, Ignition Switch
air dryer
In the OFF position, the ignition switch is vertical.
The key can be inserted and removed only in the backup lights
OFF position. Turn the key clockwise past the OFF position to
The following functions are operable when the igni- reach the ON position. When the ignition is turned
tion switch is in the OFF position (regardless of on, the following actions should occur:
whether the key is inserted): electronic gauges complete a full sweep of
low-beam headlights their dials
taillights warning and indicator lamps illuminate, then

are extinguished
brake lights
audible alert sounds for approximately four
road lights seconds or until sufficient air pressure builds
dome lights up in the primary and secondary air systems
clearance lights software revision level of the ICU is displayed

on the driver message center, followed by any
hazard warning lights active faults
turn signals IMPORTANT: If any red or amber warning or
utility lights indicator lamps do not illuminate during the ICU
self-check or do not extinguish after the self-
baggage compartment lights check completes, take the vehicle to an autho-
spotlights rized Daimler Trucks service facility as soon as
possible.
electric horn
IMPORTANT: Do not crank the engine until the
clock
ICU gauge sweep is complete.
refrigerator
5.1
Driver Controls
Turn the key clockwise past the ON position to reach up to activate the headlights, instrument panel, clear-
the START position to start the engine. Release the ance lights, marker lights, and taillights. To deactivate
key the moment the engine starts. Do not operate all vehicle lighting, ensure the switch is in the middle
the starter longer than thirty seconds, then allow the position. Move the paddle switch down to activate
starter to cool between attempts. If the starter over- only the clearance, instrument panel, marker lights,
heats, the starter protection system will prevent op- and the taillights.
eration of the starter until it has cooled. Release the
key the moment the engine starts. High-Beam Headlights
To activate the high-beam headlights, pull the turn
Lighting Controls signal lever towards the driver while the low-beam
headlights are on. Pull the turn signal lever back
Exterior Lighting Controls again to deactivate the high beams and return to low
Exterior light controls are listed here in alphabetical beam headlights.
order. When the high-beam headlights are on, a blue light
illuminates on the instrument cluster.
Backup Lights
NOTE: The ignition switch must be on for the
Backup lights provide a warning to pedestrians and high beams to work.
other drivers that the vehicle is, or is about to, back
up. Marker Light Interrupt
Daytime Running Lights A momentary interrupt switch temporarily deactivates
the marker lights and taillights. With the vehicle lights
The daytime running lights (DRL), if equipped, are
on, press and release the interrupt switch to briefly
automatically activated when the ignition is switched
turn the marker lights and taillights off. To alert the
on and the parking brake is released. The DRL oper-
driver that the switch is functioning, the dash lights
ate until the parking brake is applied or the head-
will flash with the marker lights when the switch is
lights are turned on.
actuated.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a momentary
DRL override switch. See Fig. 5.2. Press the upper Road Lights
half of the switch to briefly deactivate the DRL. Press the upper half of the road light switch to acti-
vate the road lights mounted on the bottom edge of
Fog Lights the front bumper or recessed in the front bumper.
Fog lights are designed to reduce glare in foggy con- See Fig. 5.2.
ditions. The low-beam headlights must be on in order
to turn the fog lights on. Press the upper half of the Spotlight
switch to activate the fog lights. See Fig. 5.2. The spotlight switch is located on the pivoting handle
of the spotlight. There may be a single spotlight as-
Hazard Warning Lights sembly mounted above the drivers door, or one
The hazard warning light switch tab is located below above each door.
the turn signal lever. Pull the tab out to activate the
hazard warning lights. When the hazard warning Turn Signals
lights flash, all turn signal lamps and both of the indi- The turn signal lever is mounted on the steering col-
cator lights on the control panel will flash. Move the umn. Push the lever down to activate the left-turn
turn signal lever up or down to cancel the warning signal lights; pull the lever up to activate the right-
lights. turn signal lights. To manually cancel the signal,
move the lever to the neutral position. When a turn
Headlights signal is activated, a green indicator light flashes on
A three-position paddle switch is used to operate the the instrument cluster.
exterior lights. See Fig. 5.2. Move the paddle switch
5.2
Driver Controls
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
04/24/2012 f611174
1. Spotlight Switch 5. Road Lights Switch 8. Fog Lights Switch
2. Dome Light Switch 6. Rear Strobe Light Switch 9. Headlights/Marker Lights Switch
3. Utility Lights Switch 7. Front Strobe Light Switch 10. DRL Override Switch
4. Foot Well Lights Switch
Fig. 5.2, Typical Light Controls
Utility Lights opened to illuminate the baggage compartment. The

lights also come on when the lower bunk is raised.
Utility lights can be swivel-mounted on top of the
cab, mounted on the intake/exhaust support, or flush- Cab Overhead Console Lights
mounted in the back of the cab or sleeper. Press the
upper half of the switch to activate the utility lights. The overhead console includes a clear reading light,
See Fig. 5.2. Press the lower half of the switch to a clear dome light, and a red map light. The dome
turn the utility lights off. When activated, a red indica- lights illuminate when a door opens, then stay on for
tor light in the switch is illuminated, if equipped a short time after both doors are closed. Press the
lens of the reading light, dome light, or map light to
Interior Lighting Controls activate each one.
Interior light controls are listed here in alphabetical Foot Well Lights
order.
When the driver or passenger doors are opened, red
Baggage Compartment Lights lights illuminate both foot wells. These lights can also
be activated with the foot well light switch. See
Baggage compartment lights are located on the un- Fig. 5.2. Press the upper half of the switch to turn
derside of the lower bunk, on both sides. Both lights the foot well lights on, press the lower half of the
turn on when either baggage compartment door is switch to turn them off.
5.3
Driver Controls
5
6
5
11/21/2006 f544908
2
1 Fig. 5.4, Sleeper Dome Light
Rear-Wall Dome Light

2
1
05/04/2012 f545896 A rear-wall dome light is available on all sleeper
1. Fog Light 4. Sidewall Turn Signal cabs. It is located on the rear wall where the wall
2. Headlight 5. Clearance Light meets the roof. To turn on the rear-wall fluorescent
3. Front Turn Signal 6. Marker Lights light, press the dome light switch on either the lower
or upper bunk control panels. See Fig. 5.5.
Fig. 5.3, Exterior Lights
The sleeper foot well switch is located in the lower

Sleeper Reading Lights
switch module in the sleeper. It looks identical to the Clear reading lights are mounted above the lower
cab foot well switch. See Fig. 5.2. When the switch bunk in the rear corners of the sleeper. There are
is activated, two lights illuminate the sleeper floor. two switches in the sleeper control panel for the
reading lights. To turn a reading light on, press the
Instrument Panel Lights upper half of the switch. Press the lower half of the
The instrument panel lights illuminate when the switch to turn it off. See Fig. 5.5.
headlights are turned on. When the headlights are The reading lights can also be activated by pressing
on, the panel lamp switch controls the intensity of the the lens.
instrument panel lamps. Slide the switch up to
brighten them and down to dim them. When the Horn Controls
headlights are turned on, the panel lights setting will
default to the intensity that was last set. Air Horn
Sleeper Dome Light Air horn(s) may be mounted on the roof of day cabs,
or under the driver-side floor for sleeper cabs. The
A sleeper dome light is located on the roof, between air horn is controlled by a wire lanyard that hangs
the bunk and the cab on sleeper vehicles. See down inboard by the drivers door. See Fig. 5.6. Pull
Fig. 5.4. The rear cab dome light will activate with downward on the lanyard to sound the air horn.
the dome lights when a door is opened, then stay on
for a short time after both doors are closed. Electric Horn
Use the dash-mounted switch or the switch in the
The button for the electric horn on a vehicle without
sleeper panel to activate the rear cab dome light.
an airbag is located in the center of the steering
See Fig. 5.2.
wheel. To sound the horn, press down on the button.
5.4
Driver Controls
3
5
6 1
2
1
06/13/2007 f602322
1. Lanyard
05/04/2012 f611184
1. Clock Fig. 5.6, Air Horn Control
2. Volume Control Switch
3. Fan Switch be equipped with an emissions aftertreatment
4. Reading Light system (ATS).
5. Temperature Control Switch
6. Dome Light Switch The regen request switch, located on the dash, is
7. Power Receptacle used to initiate a parked regen. See Fig. 5.7.
Fig. 5.5, Sleeper Climate Control Panel
The electric horn on a vehicle with an airbag is acti-

vated by pressing down on the top of the steering
wheel center pad. 2
The horn will sound for the duration that the button is 1
pressed, up to 60 seconds. The electric horn will op-
erate regardless of the position of the ignition key.
Powertrain Controls
04/24/2012 f611175
Aftertreatment System Regen 1. Regen Request Switch
Switches 2. Regen Request/Inhibit Switch
NOTE: See Chapter 11 for detailed information Fig. 5.7, ATS Regen Switches
about the operation of the regeneration (regen)
switches and the aftertreatment system (ATS). NOTE: The regen switch can initiate a parked
regen only when the DPF lamp is illuminated.
IMPORTANT: Depending upon local jurisdic-
tional emissions guidelines, the vehicle may not Some vehicles may be equipped with a regen
request/inhibit switch. See Fig. 5.7. To stop a regen
in progress or prevent the start of a regen, press the
5.5
Driver Controls
lower half of the switch. Regen will be delayed until UNLOCK control valve switch. See Fig. 5.8. A red
the switch is no longer active. indicator illuminates when the interaxle lock is en-
gaged.
Axle Switches
Differential Lock Switch NOTICE
The differential lock switch provides maximum trac- The interaxle lock should only be engaged when
tion for slippery conditions by forcing the wheels on the vehicle is moving slowly at low throttle. En-
each drive axle governed by the switch to rotate to- gagement at high speed or power can damage
gether. Engagement can be at any speed, provided the axle(s).
the wheels are not slipping or spinning. See Fig. 5.8.
Do not permit rear wheels to spin freely for more
than ten seconds when traction is lost. Shift into
LOCK to prevent damage to interaxle and main
differentials.
Engine Fan Switch

1
To turn the engine fan on, press the upper half of the
engine fan switch. See Fig. 5.9. The fan will continue
to operate for a set amount of time and then turn off
unless the coolant temperature is high enough to
continue fan operation. To turn the fan off before the
2 set time period ends, press the lower half of the
switch.
4
04/24/2012 f611178
Fig. 5.9, Engine Fan Switch
Hill Start Aid Override Switch

01/05/2012 f611158 Some vehicles are equipped with a Hill Start Aid
1. Interaxle Differential Lock Switch (HSA) feature to prevent the vehicle from rolling
2. Fifth Wheel Slide Switch while on steep grades and to allow for a controlled
3. Rearmost Axle Differential Lock Switch launch. HSA is active by default. It can be turned off
4. Air Suspension Dump Control Switch by pressing and releasing the HSA override switch
Fig. 5.8, Axle and Suspension Switches
on the dash (see Fig. 5.10).
Interaxle Lock Switch

The interaxle lock, standard on all dual-drive ve-
hicles, is driver-actuated by means of a LOCK/
5.6
Driver Controls
5 6 7
4 8
3
HSA 9
OVRD 1
2
10
11
06/04/2012 f611196 12
01/24/2003 f270120
Fig. 5.10, Hill Start Aid Override Switch To upshift manually, pull the lever back (towards the
driver). To downshift manually, push the lever forward
PTO Switch (away from the driver).
1. SmartShift Control Lever
To activate the PTO function, press the upper half of 2. Slide Switch (forward driving mode switch)
the switch. Press the lower half of the switch to de- 3. MAN Mode (of slide switch)
activate the PTO function. 4. AUTO Mode (of slide switch)
5. Upshift Direction
Transmission Controls 6. Reverse Position (of selector switch)
7. Selector Switch
Manual Transmissions 8. Neutral Lock Button
9. Neutral Position (of selector switch)
NOTE: See Chapter 14 for complete manual 10. Drive Position (of selector switch)
transmission operating instructions. 11. Low Position (of selector switch)
12. Downshift Direction
If so equipped, the transmission range control and
splitter valves are attached to the gear shift knob. Fig. 5.11, SmartShift Control (Eaton Fuller UltraShift
and AutoShift transmissions)
The range-preselection lever allows the selection of
the low or high range for each transmission ratio. It is
used once during an upshift sequence and once dur-
Cruise Control
ing a downshift sequence.
Depending on the transmission model, some ratios
WARNING
can be split using the splitter-control button.
Do not use the cruise control system when driv-
Eaton Automated Transmissions ing conditions do not permit maintaining a con-
stant speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
NOTE: See Chapter 15 for complete automated that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
transmission operating instructions. roads with a loose driving surface. Failure to fol-
low this precaution could cause a collision or
The SmartShift electronic transmission control is in- loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in per-
stalled with the Eaton Fuller UltraShift and sonal injury or property damage.
Eaton Fuller AutoShift transmissions. The Smart-
Shift control is operated by the fingers of the drivers
right hand, allowing both hands to remain on the NOTICE
steering wheel.
When the cruise control is engaged, do not at-
A two-position driving mode slide switch is mounted tempt to shift gears without using the clutch
on the body of the control lever just before the pedal. Failure to follow this precaution will result
paddle widens out. The slide switch allows the driver in a temporarily uncontrolled increase in engine
to choose automatic (AUTO) or manual (MAN) mode. speed. Transmission damage and gear stripping
See Fig. 5.11. could result.
5.7
Driver Controls
Cruise control is activated by two dash-mounted 2. Press the lower half of the On/Off switch.
switches: an On/Off switch and a Set/Decelerate/
Resume/Accelerate switch. See Fig. 5.12. NOTE: To resume the preselected cruise speed,
increase vehicle speed to above minimum
cruise control speed and momentarily press the
upper half of the Set/Resume/Accelerate/
Decelerate switch. Cruise will return to the last
speed selected.
2
1
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls
NOTE: See Chapter 12 for detailed information
about brake systems.
04/24/2012 f611181 Antilock Braking System

1. Set/Decelerate/Resume/Accelerate Switch The Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking System
2. Cruise Control On/Off Switch (ABS) passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at all
Fig. 5.12, Cruise Control Switches
times, and controls wheel speed during emergency
stops or wheel lock situations.
Cruise at a particular speed During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully
depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a
1. Press the upper part of the cruise control On/Off safe stop. Do not pump the brake pedal. With the
switch to turn cruise control on. brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will control all
2. Hold the accelerator pedal down until the speed- wheels to provide steering control and a reduced
ometer reaches the desired speed. braking distance.
3. Press the lower half of the Set/Resume/ The ABS is designed to communicate with a trailer
Accelerate/Decelerate switch momentarily to set ABS, if they are compatible. Compatibility will result
the cruise speed (with the vehicle moving at the in the illumination of the trailer ABS lamp during ve-
desired speed). hicle start-up and fault detection. The trailer ABS
lamp will not illuminate unless a compatible trailer is
To decrease cruise speed, press and hold the connected to the tractor.
lower half of the Set/Resume/Accelerate/
Decelerate switch to decelerate slowly. Release Vehicles with ABS may have Automatic Traction Con-
the switch when the desired speed is achieved. trol (ATC). On these vehicles, the ATC system auto-
matically limits wheel spin during reduced-traction
To increase cruise speed, press and hold the situations. In normal braking applications, the stan-
upper half of the Set/Resume/Accelerate/ dard air brake system is in effect.
Decelerate switch to accelerate slowly. Release
the switch when the desired speed is achieved. ATC includes a deep snow and mud option to in-
crease available traction on extra-soft surfaces like
Disengage cruise control snow, mud, or gravel. A switch labeled ATC will be
located on the dash. See Fig. 5.13. Press the switch
NOTE: The speed memory is lost whenever the to temporarily activate the snow/mud option. The ac-
ignition is turned off or the cruise control system tivation of the deep snow and mud option is indicated
is turned off. by a flashing WHEEL SPIN lamp. Press the switch
again to cycle the system back to normal operation.
1. Depress the brake pedal (automatic or manual
transmissions)
or
Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmissions
only).
5.8
Driver Controls
The yellow diamond-shaped knob operates the park-

ing brake valve. See Fig. 5.15. Pull the knob out to
apply the tractor and the trailer spring parking
brakes. Push the knob in to release the spring park-
ing brakes. Before the spring parking brakes can be
released, the air pressure in either air brake system
must be at least 65 psi (447 kPa).
If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking
brakes, pull the parking brake valve out to apply the
tractor parking brakes and the trailer service brakes.
04/24/2012 f611180
Fig. 5.13, ATC Switch 1

2
NOTICE
The deep snow and mud option is intended to be
used under specific slippery conditions that re-
quire momentary increased wheel spin. Using
this option for an extended period of time may
03/10/99 f610291
damage the brake system.
1. Trailer Air Supply Valve (red knob)
Engine Brake Switch 2. Parking Brake Control Valve (yellow knob)
The Hi/Med/Lo engine brake 3-position switch con- Fig. 5.15, Brake Valve Control Knobs
trols the amount of engine braking. Press the lower
third of the switch for low, center for medium, and Trailer Air Supply Valve
upper third for high. See Fig. 5.14. The red octagonal-shaped knob operates the trailer
air supply valve, which charges the trailer air supply
system and releases the trailer spring parking
brakes. See Fig. 5.15.
After the vehicle and its air hoses are connected to a
trailer and the pressure in the air system is at least
65 psi (447 kPa), push the trailer air supply valve
knob in (and leave it in) to charge the trailer air sup-
ply system and release the trailer spring parking
brakes. Pull the trailer air supply valve out before
disconnecting a trailer or when operating a vehicle
without a trailer.
06/04/2012 f611176
Fig. 5.14, Engine Brake Switch Trailer Brake Lever

The trailer brake lever is used to apply the trailer ser-
Parking Brake Control Valve vice brakes without applying the truck or tractor ser-
vice brakes. It is usually mounted on the right-hand
NOTICE control panel. See Fig. 5.16. The valve can be par-
tially or fully applied, but in any partially on position it
Do not step on the service brake pedal while the will be overridden by a full application of the service
parking brakes are applied. To do so can cause brake pedal. Move the lever down to apply the trailer
damage to the brake mechanisms. brakes; move the lever up to release the trailer
5.9
Driver Controls
brakes. The lever will automatically return to the up the wipers will perform a single, low speed dry wipe
position when it is released. (mist function). When pressed for more than 1/2-
second, the wash cycle begins and continues for
three cycles or until the paddle is released. When the
bottom paddle is pushed up, the wipers operate in
fast delay. When the bottom paddle is pushed down,
the wipers operate in slow delay. With the wipers in
delay mode (fast or slow), push the bottom paddle
up to shorten the delay period, or push the paddle
down to lengthen it.
Suspension/Trailer Connection
Controls
Air Suspension Dump Control Switch
10/17/2001 f610591
Fig. 5.16, Trailer Brake Lever NOTICE

Do not operate the vehicle over uneven ground
Windshield Wiper/Washer such as ramps, speed bumps, curbs, etc. with
Controls the air springs deflated. Doing this may lead to
air bag separation from the piston, preventing the
suspension air springs from re-inflating.
NOTICE
The air suspension height control switch may be
Do not attempt to manually move the windshield used to aid in connecting or disconnecting from a
wiper arms. Wiper motor damage will occur if the trailer. See Fig. 5.8. When the switch is set to
arms are forcibly moved. LOWER, the air suspension dump valve deflates the
air springs to lower the rear of the vehicle. In the
The wipers are operated by a dual paddle switch lo- AUTO position, the automatic ride-control valves op-
cated on the auxiliary instrument panel. See erate for normal driving.
Fig. 5.17. To turn the wipers on or off, press the top
paddle in. When the top paddle is pushed up, the
wipers will operate at high speed; when it is pushed NOTICE
down, they will wipe at low speed.
Never exhaust air from the suspension while
driving. When the air is exhausted, the suspen-
sion will not absorb road shocks, and compo-
nents may be damaged.
A red LED in the switch is illuminated when the sus-
pension is deflated.
Fifth Wheel Slide Control Switch

NOTICE
05/01/2012 f611185 Do not activate the fifth wheel slide control valve
while the vehicle is in motion. To do so could
Fig. 5.17, Windshield Wiper Switch cause damage to the fifth wheel member, the
kingpin, the cab or trailer, and ultimately to the
The bottom paddle, when pushed in, turns the
drivetrain.
washers on. When pressed for less than 1/2-second,
5.10
Driver Controls
The fifth wheel air slide valve allows repositioning of 1 2 3 4 5

the sliding fifth wheel from inside the cab. See
Fig. 5.8. Move the air slide control valve switch to
the LOCK position to lock the fifth wheel to the base- BUNK
plate. Move the switch to the UNLOCK position to HI
unlock the fifth wheel slide mechanism, allowing BUNK
changes to the total length of the tractor-trailer and OFF
changes to axle loads to comply with state or provin- FAN
cial laws.
05/01/2012 f611183
For detailed operating instructions for fifth wheel
1. Bunk Override Switch
slide, refer to Chapter 17. A red indicator light illumi- 2. Air Recirculation Switch
nates whenever the fifth wheel slide is unlocked. 3. Fan Switch
4. Air Selection Switch
Trailer Auxiliary Switch 5. Temperature Control Switch
Some trailers with pneumatic brakes are equipped Fig. 5.18, Cab Climate Control Panel
with power for the trailer lights. The connection is
passed from the vehicle to the trailer via the primary red area for warm air. Turn the switch counterclock-
receptacle, controlled by a dash switch. wise to the blue area for cool air.
Press the top of the switch to activate the trailer aux- The climate control panel may also be equipped with
iliary function. Press the bottom of the switch to turn up to three rocker switches that can control recircula-
trailer auxiliary function off. tion, air conditioning, and bunk override.
When the recirculation switch is activated, the HVAC
Climate Controls system limits the amount of outside air that enters
the cab. Activate the recirculation switch to prevent
NOTE: See Chapter 6 for detailed climate con- dusty or smoky air from entering the cab.
trol panel operating instructions.
NOTE: To prevent the buildup of odors and/or
Cab Climate Control oxygen depletion inside the cab, the system
switches from full recirculation mode to partial
The climate control panel allows the control of heat- recirculation mode after 20 minutes.
ing, ventilating, defrosting, and air conditioning (A/C)
functions. See Fig. 5.18. The cab climate control The A/C cools and dehumidifies the air inside the
panel has three knobs to control the functions of the cab. Press the A/C switch to turn the A/C on or off.
cab temperature system: Press the bunk override switch to make the cab con-
fan switch trols override the settings on the sleeper temperature
control panel; the sleeper temperature will mimic the
air selection switch cab settings.
temperature control switch
Sleeper Climate Control
The fan switch controls the fan speed, and forces
fresh or recirculated air through the air outlets. To The sleeper temperature can be controlled from the
increase airflow, turn the switch clockwise to a higher sleeper climate control panel or from the cab climate
number. To decrease airflow, turn the switch counter- control panel if the bunk override switch is activated.
clockwise to a lower number. See Fig. 5.5.
The air selection switch allows the control of air flow The fan switch controls the sleeper temperature fan
through the face outlets, the floor outlets, the defrost speed. To increase airflow, turn the switch clockwise
(windshield) outlets, or a combination of these out- to a higher number. To decrease the airflow, turn the
lets. switch counterclockwise to a lower number.
The temperature control switch is used to select the The temperature control switch is used to select the
desired temperature. Turn the switch clockwise to the desired temperature in the sleeper. Turn the switch
5.11
Driver Controls
clockwise to the red area for warm air. Turn the Height adjustment
switch counterclockwise to the blue area for cool air.
Bottom cushion angle (fore-and-aft bottom
Cancel bunk override mode, if activated, by changing cushion height)
the sleeper fan speed or temperature setting. The
system will then operate from the sleeper controls. Fore-and-aft seat slide (seat track adjustment)
Seat tilt
Seat Controls Headrest adjustment
NOTE: See Chapter 7 for detailed information
about seat controls and adjustments. Adjustable Steering Column
Controls
WARNING
The adjustable steering column control button is lo-
Keep hands, tools, and other objects away from cated on the outboard sidewall of the cab. See
the scissor points under the seats. Failure to do Fig. 5.20.
so could cause personal injury.
After adjusting the seat to the desired ride position,
The following is a description of adjustments that can unlock the steering column by pushing and holding
be made to various seats. Not all seats have all of the tilt/telescope button down with the outboard foot.
the adjustments listed below. See Fig. 5.19. Tilt the steering column and the steering wheel tele-
scope function to the desired position. Release the
Backrest tilt
tilt/telescope button to lock the steering wheel and
Lumbar support column in place.
Isolator
1
3 4
2
8
6 7
5
10/26/2000 f910149a
1. Backrest Tilt 5. Bottom Cushion Angle (fore-and- 7. Seat Tilt
2. Lumbar Support aft cushion height) 8. Upper Backrest Adjustment
3. Isolator Feature 6. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide (seat
4. Height Adjustment track adjustment)
Fig. 5.19, General Seat Adjustments
5.12
Driver Controls
3
2
1
05/07/2012 f462240
1. Brake Pedal 3. Steering Column
2. Accelerator Pedal 4. Tilt/Telescope Button
Fig. 5.20, Steering Column Tilt/Telescope Button (RHD
shown)
5.13
6
Climate Control
Cab Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Sleeper Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Climate Control
Cab Climate Control Panel Temperature Control Knob

The climate control panel allows the driver to control The temperature control knob is used to select the
the heating, ventilating, defrosting, and air condition- desired temperature in the cab. Turn the knob coun-
ing (A/C) functions. See Fig. 6.1. The cab climate terclockwise for cool air, or clockwise for hot air.
control panel has three knobs to control the functions
of the cab temperature system: Air Selection Knob
fan control knob The air selection knob allows the driver to control the
flow of air through the face outlets, the floor outlets,
air selection knob
the defrost (windshield) outlets, or a combination of
temperature control knob these outlets.
The climate control panel may also be equipped with Air Conditioning Mode: Cools and dehumidifies
up to three rocker switches to control recirculation, the air inside the cab
air conditioning, and bunk override. Face Mode: Directs all airflow through the face
or instrument panel outlets.
1 2 3 4 5
Bi-Level Mode: Directs the airflow equally to
the face outlets and the floor outlets.
Floor Mode: Directs all airflow through the floor
BUNK
HI
BUNK outlets.
Floor/Defrost Mode: Directs the airflow equally
OFF
FAN
to the floor outlets and the defrost outlets.

05/01/2012 f611183 Defrost Mode: Directs all airflow through the
1. Bunk Override Switch defrost outlets.
2. Air Recirculation Switch
3. Fan Control Knob IMPORTANT: Operate the air conditioner at
4. Air Selection Knob least five minutes each month, even during cool
5. Temperature Control Knob weather. This helps prevent drying and cracking
Fig. 6.1, Cab Climate Control Panel
of tubing seals, reducing refrigerant leaks in the
system.
All of the dash-face outlets have adjustable louvers
that pivot right and left, and up and down. The out-
NOTE: Shutting off the heater supply gate valve
lets can be closed by moving the louvers all the way (if equipped) on the engine limits the ability to
down. Windshield defrost outlets and the passengers control air conditioning temperature in the cab
door window defrost outlet have non-adjustable lou- and in the sleeper. With the valve shut off, warm
vers. The bunk outlet (at the right-hand rear corner of coolant is no longer available from the engine,
the bunk) has two sets of vertical louvers that oper- and the outlet air temperature controls cant be
ate like the horizontal dash-face louvers. used to change air temperature.
Fan Control Knob Recirculation Switch

The fan control knob activates the fan, which forces When the recirculation switch is activated, the HVAC
fresh air or recirculated air through the air outlets. system limits the amount of outside air that enters
The fan control knob has eight fan speed settings the cab. Activate the recirculation switch to prevent
and an OFF position. dusty or smoky air from entering the cab. Recircula-
To operate the fan knob, turn knob clockwise to in- tion mode can also decrease the time required to
crease airflow, or counterclockwise to decrease air- cool or heat the cab interior during extreme outside
flow. temperature conditions. When the recirculation mode
6.1
Climate Control
is turned on, the amber indicator on the recirculation

switch will illuminate.
The recirculation switch will not work when the mode 4
control switch is in either defog or defrost modes.
IMPORTANT: To prevent the buildup of fumes or
odors inside the cab (for example, from smok-
ing) do not operate the heater and air condition- 3
ing system in recirculation mode for more than 5
20 minutes.
Bunk Override Switch

The bunk override switch, equipped on sleeper cabs 6
only, allows the driver to control sleeper heat and 2
A/C settings from the cab. Press the bunk override
switch to turn the sleeper heat or A/C on. An amber
indicator will illuminate when bunk override mode is
activated. 7
Press the bunk override switch again to turn bunk 1

override mode off. Adjusting the sleeper climate con-
trols at any time will also cause the bunk override
mode to cancel. 05/04/2012 f611184
1. Clock
2. Sound System Volume Knob
Sleeper Climate Control Panel 3. Fan Control Knob
4. Reading Light
An auxiliary heater and air conditioner unit is stan-
5. Temperature Control Knob
dard when there is a sleeper compartment. The unit 6. Dome Light Switch
is installed in the right side sleeper baggage com- 7. Power Receptacle
partment and uses the cabs refrigerant liquid system
for air conditioner operation. The unit is equipped Fig. 6.2, Sleeper Climate Control Panel
with a separate evaporator coil, expansion valve, and
fan. It is also equipped with its own heater core and vated, fresh air rapidly displaces stale air as the cab
water valve, independent of the cab heater. The aux- pressurizes.
iliary units climate control panel is mounted on the
right rear wall or the rear overhead storage compart- Fan Control Knob
ment. The fan control knob activates the fan, which forces
The standard sleeper climate control panel has a fan air through the air outlets. The fan control knob has
control knob and a temperature control knob. See eight fan speeds and an OFF position.
Fig. 6.2. To operate the fan control knob, turn the knob clock-
If the bunk override switch has been activated, the wise to increase airflow, or counterclockwise to de-
override mode can be canceled by changing the crease airflow.
sleeper fan speed or temperature setting. The cli- IMPORTANT: To prevent the buildup of fumes or
mate control system will then operate from the
odors inside the sleeper (for example, from
sleeper controls.
smoking) do not operate the heater and air con-
When the climate control unit is set for fresh air, 300 ditioning system in recirculation mode for more
cubic feet per minute of air is provided to the sleeper than 20 minutes.
and stale air is exhausted through a vent in the left
rear area of the sleeper. When the system is acti- NOTE: When the cab air conditioner (A/C) is on,
the sleeper fan will operate at low speed even if
6.2
Climate Control
the sleeper fan knob is turned to OFF. This is

necessary to protect the evaporator in the
sleeper heater and air conditioner system from
freezing. At lower fan speed settings, a slight
increase in airflow levels may appear at times,
as the control acts to regulate the evaporator
temperature.
Temperature Control Knob

The temperature control knob is used to select the
desired temperature in the sleeper. Turn the knob
counterclockwise for cool air, or clockwise for hot air.
6.3
7
Seats and Restraints
Seats, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Freightliner High-Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Bostrom Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
EzyRider Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
National Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
ABTS Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
Sleeper Compartment Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Steering Wheel Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Seats, General Information Lumbar Support changes the shape of the

backrest to give more or less support to the
Unless otherwise noted, all seat adjustments should occupants lumbar (lower back) area. This ad-
be made while seated and before the engine is justment is either mechanical or air controlled,
started. depending on the seat model.
Due to the high degree of adjustability of mid- and Fore/Aft Isolator feature reduces the amount of
high-back air suspension seats, it is possible to com- road shock by isolating the occupant from the
bine the seat back recline adjustment and the seat motion of the vehicle, and allowing the upper
slide adjustment so that the seat back contacts the seat to move in a simple pendulum motion. A
back wall. Use care when adjusting the seat to pre- lockout feature is used whenever the isolator is
vent damage to the seat and the cab interior. not desired.
Height Adjustment moves the entire seat up or
WARNING down. The adjustment is either manually- or
air-controlled, depending on the seat model.
Keep hands, tools, and other objects away from
the scissor points under the seats. Failure to do Bottom Cushion Angle (fore-and-aft bottom
so could cause personal injury. cushion height) enables the occupant to raise
or lower the front or back of the bottom cush-
The following is a description of adjustments that can ion. This adjustment is easier to perform when
be made to various Argosy seats. Not all seats have all weight is removed from the seat.
all of the adjustments listed below. See Fig. 7.1.
Backrest Tilt enables the backrest to pivot for-
ward or backward.
1
3 4
2
8
6 7
5
10/26/2000 f910149a
1. Backrest Tilt 5. Bottom Cushion Tilt (fore-and-aft 7. Seat Tilt
2. Lumbar Support cushion height) 8. Headrest Adjustment
3. Fore/Aft Isolator 6. Fore/Aft Seat Slide (seat track
4. Height Adjustment adjustment)
Fig. 7.1, General Seat Adjustments
7.1
Fore/Aft Seat Slide (seat track adjustment) Backrest Tilt

moves the entire seat forward or backward on
its track. To tilt the backrest, lean forward slightly to remove
pressure from the cushion, then turn the knob for-
Seat Tilt allows the seat assembly (back and ward or rearward to achieve the desired position.
bottom cushions) to tilt forward or backward.
Headrest Adjustment changes the angle of the Lumbar Support
upper part of the backrest to provide head and
To adjust the lumbar support, use the lumbar support
upper back support.
switches on the side of the seat.
Freightliner High-Back Seat Height Adjustment
See Fig. 7.2 for seat adjustment controls. Not all To raise or lower the height of the seat, use the
models of the seat have all the adjustments listed height adjustment switch on the side of the seat.
below.
1
6
2 4 10
3 9
5 8
7
07/18/2007 f910576
NOTE: Not all models of the seat have all the adjustment controls shown.
1. Rear Cushion Height Adjustment 4. Bottom Cushion Extension Handle 8. Shock Absorber Lever
Knob 5. Fore/Aft Seat Slide Lever 9. Height Adjustment Switch
2. Fore/Aft Isolator 6. Backrest Tilt Knob 10 Lumbar Support Switches
3. Front Cushion Height Adjustment 7. Heater Button
Knob
Fig. 7.2, Freightliner High-Back Seat
7.2
Bottom Cushion Extension Bostrom Seat

To adjust the fore-and-aft position of the seat cush- See Fig. 7.3 for Bostrom seat adjustment controls.
ion, remove your weight from the seat, then lift up
and pull forward on the cushion adjustment handle.
To return the cushion to the aft position, lift up and
push rearward.
Fore/Aft Seat Slide

To adjust the fore-and-aft position of the entire seat,
move the fore-and-aft seat adjustment lever to the
left and slide the seat forward or backward to the
desired position. Move the lever back to its original 1
position to lock the seat in place. 6
Fore/Aft Isolator
To engage the isolator, turn the isolator knob rear-
ward to the unlocked position. Turn the isolator knob
forward to the locked position when the isolator fea- 5 2
ture is not desired.
3
4
Shock Absorber 12/03/2010 f910131a
1. Backrest Recline Lever
To adjust the amount of damping the shock absorber 2. Air Lumbar Switches
provides, move the lever up to increase damping; 3. Height Adjustment Switch
move the lever down to decrease damping. 4. Bottom Cushion Tilt Knob
5. Isolator and Fore/Aft Seat Slide Lever
Front Cushion Height 6. Mechanical Lumbar Knob
To adjust the height of the front of the cushion, re- Fig. 7.3, Bostrom Seat Adjustment Controls
move your weight from the seat, then turn the adjust-
ment knob toward the front of the seat (clockwise) to Backrest Recline
increase cushion height. To lower the cushion height,
turn the adjustment knob toward the rear of the seat To recline the backrest, lean forward slightly to re-
(counterclockwise). move pressure from the cushion and hold the back-
rest recline lever rearward. Lean forward or back-
Rear Cushion Height ward slowly to the desired position and release the
lever to lock the backrest in place.
To adjust the height of the rear of the seat cushion,
remove your weight from the seat and turn the rear Bottom Cushion Tilt
cushion adjustment knob to one of three positions.
To adjust the bottom cushion tilt, rotate the bottom
Heater cushion tilt knob to increase or decrease tilt.
To turn on the heat option, press the button. To turn Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide
off the heat option, press the button again. If the ve-
hicle has Optimized Idle, seat heating will not oper- To adjust the fore-and-aft position of the entire seat,
ate with the key in accessory mode. Optimized Idle hold the fore-and-aft adjustment lever to the left and
may also turn seat heating off to reduce stress on slide the seat forward or backward to the desired
the batteries. position.
7.3
Height Adjustment
To raise the seat, press the upper portion of the
height adjustment switch. To lower the seat, press 7
the lower portion of the switch.
Isolator
To engage the isolator, put the isolator lever in the
center position. Lock out the isolator by moving the 6
lever to the right.
Lumbar Support
To increase lumbar support on standard models, ro-
tate the mechanical lumbar knob forward. To de-
crease lumbar support, rotate the knob rearward.
To increase lumbar support on optional models,
press the plus sign on the air lumbar switch. To de-
crease lumbar support, press the minus sign on the
switch.
EzyRider Seat
For EzyRider seat adjustment controls, see Fig. 7.4.
Armrest Angle (optional armrests)

To adjust the vertical angle of the armrest, turn the
adjustment knob on the underside of the armrest. 1
Backrest Recline 2
5
4
To recline the backrest, raise the backrest recline 3
lever and lean forward or backward. Release the 11/24/2009 f910616
lever to lock the cushion in place. 1. Fore/Aft Seat 5. Backrest Recline
Adjustment Lever Lever
Bottom Cushion Angle 2. Isolation Adjustment 6. Bottom Cushion Angle
3. Height Adjustment Guide
To adjust the bottom cushion angle, pull the bottom 4. Lumbar Support 7. Armrest Adjustment
cushion up and forward or down and back. The bot- Switch
tom cushion angle is controlled by the guides on
Fig. 7.4, EzyRider Seat Adjustment Controls
each side of the seat.
Fore-and-Aft Slide Adjustment Isolator

To adjust the isolator, move to the switch left to allow
To adjust the fore-and-aft position of the entire seat,
insolation; move it to the right to lock the isolator.
lift the bar and slide the seat to the desired positon.
Height Adjustment
To raise or lower the seat, use the height adjustment
switch on the side of the seat.
7.4
Lumbar Support Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide

To adjust the amount of support for your lower back, To adjust the fore-and-aft position of the entire seat,
push the front of the switch to inflate the lower lum- move the fore-and-aft seat adjustment lever to the
bar bag, push the rear of the switch to deflate the left and slide the seat forward or backward to the
bag. desired position. Move the lever back to its original
position to lock the seat in place.
National Seat Height Adjustment
See Fig. 7.5 for National seat adjustment controls.
To raise or lower the height of the seat, use the
height adjustment switch on the side of the seat.
Isolator
To engage the isolator, turn the isolator lever to the
horizontal position. Lock out the isolator by turning
the isolator lever down.
7
Lumbar Support
To adjust the lumbar support, use the lumbar support
6
switch on the side of the seat.
1
Rear Cushion Adjustment
5
To adjust the height of the rear of the seat cushion,
remove your weight from the seat and turn the rear
2 cushion adjustment knob to one of three positions.
4 3
ABTS Seat
11/14/2000 f910445
See Fig. 7.6 for ABTS (all-belts-to-seat) seat adjust-
1. Backrest Recline Knob ment controls.
2. Lumbar Support Switch
3. Height Adjustment Switch
4. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide Lever
Cushion Extension Adjustment
5. Bottom Cushion Extension Handle Move the cushion extension adjustment lever to the
6. Isolator Handle left and move the seat cushion to the desired posi-
7. Rear Cushion Adjustment Knob
tion.
Fig. 7.5, National 2000 Series Seat Adjustment Controls
Track Adjustment
Backrest Recline To adjust the fore-and-aft position of the entire seat,
To recline the backrest, turn the backrest recline lift the track adjustment handle and slide the seat to
knob until the desired position is reached. the desired position.
Bottom Cushion Extension Isolator

To adjust the bottom cushion, lift the bottom cushion Pull up the isolator control handle to lock out the iso-
adjustment handle and pull forward or push back to lation movement.
the desired setting.
7.5
Seat Tilt Control

Set the seat tilt control to one of the five positions to
set cushion rake adjustment.
Backrest Adjustment
To tilt the backrest backward, pull up on the recliner
10 handle while leaning backward. To tilt the backrest
forward, pull up on the recliner handle while leaning
forward.
Armrest Adjustment
Rotate the control knob, located on the underside of
the armrest, to set the desired angle of the armrest.
9
8
Shoulder Belt Height Control
Adjust the shoulder belt height. The height can be
adjusted vertically by 3 inches (75 mm).
7
Seat Belts and Tether Belts
Seat belt assemblies are designed to secure persons
in the vehicle to help reduce the chance of injury or
1
the amount of injury resulting from accidents or sud-
den stops. For this reason, Daimler Trucks North
6 America LLC (DTNA) urges that the driver and all
5 2
4 passengers, regardless of age or physical condition,
3 use seat belts when riding in the vehicle.
11/30/2011 f910676
1. Cushion Extension Adjustment Lever
2. Track Adjustment Handle WARNING
3. Isolator Control Handle
4. Upper Lumbar Adjustment Switch Always use the vehicles seat belt system when
5. Lower Lumbar Adjustment Switch operating the vehicle. Failure to do so can result
6. Seat Height Adjustment Switch in severe personal injury or death.
7. Seat Tilt Control
8. Recliner Handle Seat belt assemblies in DTNA vehicles meet Federal
9. Armrest Control Knob Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 209, "Type 1" and
10. Shoulder Belt Height Control "Type 2" requirements.
Fig. 7.6, ABTS Seat Adjustment Controls When transporting a child, always use a child re-
straint system or the vehicle seat belts as appropri-
Lumbar Adjustment ate. To determine whether a child restraint system is
required, review and comply with applicable state
Push the middle rocker switch to adjust the lower and local laws. Any child restraint used must comply
lumbar bag. Push the forward switch to adjust the with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213,
upper lumbar bag. "Child Restraint Systems." When providing a child
restraint system, always carefully read and follow all
Seat Height Adjustment instructions pertaining to installation and usage for
Push the seat height adjustment switch to raise or the child. Make certain the child remains in the re-
lower the seat suspension. straint system at all times when the vehicle is in
motion.
7.6
In addition to seat belt assemblies, tether belts are

installed on suspension-type seats. Tether belts help WARNING
secure the seat to the floor and are intended to re-
strain the seat and seat belt in case of an accident or Wear three-point seat belts only as described
sudden stop. below. Three-point seat belts are designed to be
worn by one person at a time. In case of an acci-
IMPORTANT: Seat belts have a finite life which dent or sudden stop, personal injury or death
may be much shorter than the life of the vehicle. could result from misuse.
Regular inspections and replacement as needed
Fasten the seat belts before driving. Fastening a
are the only assurance of adequate seat belt three-point seat belt while driving creates a haz-
security over the life of the vehicle. ard.
Seat Belt Inspection 1. Slowly pull the link end of the three-point seat
belt out of the retractor and pull it across your
lap (from outboard to inboard) far enough to en-
WARNING gage the buckle. If the retractor locks too soon,
allow the belt to retract slightly, then slowly pull it
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of out again.
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and 2. Fasten the three-point seat belt by pushing the
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an link into the buckle until it latches (Fig. 7.7). Give
accident, and the seat belt system was in use, the belt a tug at the buckle. If the buckle un-
the entire vehicle seat belt system must be re- latches, repeat this step. If the problem contin-
placed before operating the vehicle. Do not at- ues, replace the three-point seat belt.
tempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
could change the effectiveness of the system.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
making any modifications to the system, may re-
sult in personal injury or death.
Inspect the seat belts and tether belts (if so
equipped).
1. Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme dirt and
dust, or for severe fading from exposure to sun-
light, especially near the buckle latch plate and in
the D-loop guide area.
2. Check operation of the buckle, latch, Komfort
Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch (if equipped), web
retractor, and upper seat belt mount on the door
pillar. Check all visible components for wear or
damage.
01/18/95 f910004a
3. Check the seat belt and tether belt connection
points and tighten any that are loose. Fig. 7.7, Fastening the Three-Point Belt
3. Position the shoulder strap diagonally across

Seat Belt Operation your chest with the adjustable D-loop bracket (if
Three-Point Seat Belt With Komfort Latch equipped). The shoulder strap must be centered
on your shoulder and chest, away from your face
NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Kom- and neck. See Fig. 7.8. If desired, engage the
fort Latch, see the seat belt operation under the Komfort Latch as follows.
heading "Three-Point Seat Belt."
Pull on the shoulder strap to lessen the pressure
of the strap on your shoulder and chest. Allow no
7.7
more than one inch (2.5 cm) of slack between

your chest and the shoulder harness. More slack
can significantly reduce the seat belts effective-
ness in an accident or a sudden stop. While
holding the belt slack, press the Komfort Latch
lever up, clamping the seat belt webbing
(Fig. 7.9 and Fig. 7.10).
11/02/95 f910144
Fig. 7.10, Locking Komfort Latch

A B C
08/09/2010 f910634
A. CorrectBelt is centered on your shoulder and

chest, away from your face and neck.
B. WrongBelt must not rub against face or neck.
C. WrongBelt must not hang off shoulder.
Fig. 7.8, Proper Shoulder Strap Fit
01/18/95 f910049a
Fig. 7.11, Releasing the Three-Point Seat Belt
or other abnormal conditions. Make sure the

01/06/95 f910048a three-point seat belt is completely retracted
A. 1 Inch (2.5 cm) Maximum when it is not in use.
Fig. 7.9, Adjusting Shoulder Harness Clearance Three-Point Seat Belt
4. To unbuckle the three-point seat belt, push the NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Komfort
button on the buckle as shown in Fig. 7.11. If the Latch, see the seat belt operation under the
Komfort Latch was used, release it by giving the heading "Three-Point Seat Belt With Komfort
shoulder belt a quick tug. If you lean forward Latch."
against the shoulder belt, the Komfort Latch will
automatically release, and will need to be reset.
WARNING
NOTE: The Komfort Latch does not have to be
released in an emergency situation. The Kom- Wear three-point seat belts only as described
fort Latch will release by itself under rough road below. Three-point seat belts are designed to be
7.8
worn by one person at a time. In case of an acci- jury or the amount of injury resulting from accidents
dent or sudden stop, personal injury or death or sudden stops.
could result from misuse.
Fasten the seat belts before driving. Fastening a
Bunk Restraint Adjustment
three-point seat belt while driving creates a haz- 1. Make sure the belt is attached to the bunk sup-
ard. port and sleeper wall.
1. Slowly pull the link end of the three-point seat 2. To lengthen the belt, tip the link end downward
belt out of the retractor and pull it across your and pull the link until it connects with the buckle.
lap (from outboard to inboard) far enough to en-
gage the buckle. If the retractor locks too soon, 3. After the belt is connected, shorten it by pulling
allow the belt to retract slightly, then slowly pull it on the loose end until the belt is snug, but com-
out again. fortable. Be sure the belts are not twisted. See
Fig. 7.12.
2. Fasten the three-point seat belt by pushing the
latch into the buckle. Listen for an audible click.
See Fig. 7.7. 2
3. Tug on the seat belt to make sure it is securely
fastened. If the buckle unlatches, repeat this
A
step. If the problem continues, replace the three-
1
point seat belt.
4. Snug the seat belt to your waist. 3
5. Position the shoulder strap diagonally across

your chest with the adjustable D-loop bracket (if 01/06/95 f910068a
equipped). The shoulder strap must be centered A. Pull on the loose end to shorten the belt.
on your shoulder and chest, away from your face
1. Buckle 3. Link
and neck. See Fig. 7.8. 2. Belt Release Button
6. To unbuckle the three-point seat belt, press the
Fig. 7.12, Bunk Restraint Adjustment
release button on the buckle; see Fig. 7.11.
NOTE: Make sure the three-point seat belt is Bunk Restraint Operation
completely retracted when it is not in use.
1. Starting at the foot of the bunk, pull the link end
of the belt up far enough to engage the buckle.
Sleeper Compartment See Fig. 7.13.
Restraints 2. Fasten the belt by pushing the link end into the
buckle until it latches. Make sure that the belt is
WARNING not twisted. Check the engagement by trying to
pull the link out of the buckle. If they come apart,
Do not use the sleeper compartment while the repeat this step. If the problem continues, re-
vehicle is in motion unless a bunk restraint is place the belt. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the
installed and used. Not using the bunk restraint other two belts located in the middle and upper
increases the chance of injury, or the degree of portion of the bunk to lock the restraint in place.
injury, from accidents or sudden stops to all oc- 3. To release the bunk restraint, push the release
cupants of the vehicle. button on the buckle at the head of the bunk and
On vehicles equipped with a sleeper compartment, pull the link from the buckle.
bunk restraints should be used whenever the sleeper Repeat this step for the other two buckles to
compartment is occupied and the vehicle is moving. completely release the bunk restraint.
Restraints are designed to lessen the chance of in-
7.9
seat back and your head upright. Fasten your seat

belt and ensure that it is properly positioned on your
2 3 body as described under the "Seat Belt Operation"
heading. Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seat position will help
keep you a safe distance from the inflating air bag.
Inspection and Service

WARNING
4 Do not attempt to service or modify the air bag
5 system. Unintentional or improper air bag deploy-
ment could cause severe bodily injury or death.
Contact an authorized Freightliner service facility
1 for all service and maintenance.
02/14/96 f910150
The air bag system contains components that
1. Mattress 4. Belt Anchor use combustible chemicals. Do not cut, drill,
2. Sleeper Wall 5. Buckle braze, solder, weld, strike, or probe the air bag
3. Restraint
components. Keep all liquids and chemicals
Fig. 7.13, Bunk Restraint away from air bag components.
The surface of the deployed air bag may contain
Steering Wheel Air Bag small amounts of sodium hydroxide (which is a
by-product of the gas generant combustion) and
Operation metallic sodium. Sodium hydroxide may be irri-
NOTE: Only vehicles with the letters "SRS" tating to the skin and eyes. Immediately wash
molded into the steering wheel center pad are your hands and exposed skin areas with a mild
equipped with a steering wheel air bag. soap and water. Flush your eyes immediately if
exposed to sodium hydroxide.
The air bag, when used with seat belts, provides ad-
ditional protection to the driver in severe frontal colli- The operational readiness of the air bag system is
sions. Steering wheel air bags are designed to inflate indicated by the supplemental restraint system (SRS)
only in severe frontal collisions. The driver and the indicator on the dash. The SRS indicator illuminates
passenger should always wear seat belts. The steer- for several seconds when the ignition is turned on,
ing wheel air bag will activate during a collision even and then it goes off. The indicator will remain on if
if the seat belts are not fastened, but the system is there is a problem with the air bag system. The ve-
designed to provide protection to the occupant only hicle should be serviced if the SRS indicator does
when the seat belts are fastened. not illuminate when the ignition is turned on, or if the
SRS indicator remains on.
WARNING The air bag module may contain perchlorate mate-
rial; for information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
Keep all heavy objects in the cab secured. Do not hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Special handling may
place objects on the steering wheel or between apply; follow appropriate rules and regulations when
you and the steering wheel. Any such objects disposing of materials.
may cause harm during an accident. Keep your For all service and maintenance, contact an autho-
hands on the sides and lower portion of the rized Freightliner service facility.
steering wheel. Failure to follow these instruc-
tions may result in death or personal injury.
For maximum protection in a collision, always be in a
normal seated position with your back against the
7.10
8
Cab and Sleeper Features
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Sleeper Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Windows
The windows in both doors operate manually or elec-
trically (if so equipped). For manual windows, use the
crank handle installed on the door to raise or lower a
door window.
For electric windows, press the upper half of the
switch to raise the window. To lower the window,
press the lower half of the switch. See Fig. 8.1.
10/28/2009 f611080
Fig. 8.2, Mirror Heat Switch
A power outlet that supplies 12V power for accesso-

ries and an ashtray/coin holder are be located below
the cup holders.
Lighting
See Chapter 5 for detailed information regarding
lighting controls.
10/09/2001 f610522
Radio and CB
Fig. 8.1, Power Window Switch
The radio and CB are typically installed in the over-
head console. An optional hot mount may be in-
Mirrors stalled on the dash for fleet CB radios.
The standard outside mirrors are mounted on the
door frame. The power mirrors are controlled with a Storage Areas
left-hand or right-hand mirror selector switch, and a Vehicles may have two glove boxes and three
directional switch. Select the left mirror, or the right molded storage bins located in the overhead console
mirror using the corresponding arrow selection on the assembly. See Fig. 8.3. Optionally, a citizens band
mirror selector switch. The mirror can then be ad- (C/B) radio may be installed in place of the driver-
justed by pressing the arrows on the 4-way direc- side glove box.. Storage pockets are also molded
tional switch. into the lower portion of the driver and passenger
Mirrors may be equipped with an optional heater to doors.
keep them clear of fog, frost, and ice. To heat the
mirrors, press the upper part of the mirror heat
switch on the dash. See Fig. 8.2.
Cab Amenities
Argosy vehicles are available with many optional fea-
tures. The following are some of those options.
Center Dash Panel

The cab is equipped with two cup holders and three 05/15/98 f680007
storage trays molded into the center dash.
Fig. 8.3, Overhead Storage
8.1
Sleeper Amenities
Argosy sleepers are available with many optional
features. The following are some of those options.
Baggage Compartment Doors

The baggage compartment doors are intended as a
convenient means to stow or remove items under the
bunk. The baggage compartment doors can be
opened using the pull cable located near the aft edge
of the cab door opening on the sidewall behind the
seat.
IMPORTANT: Some baggage compartment
doors are two-stage latching. When closing the
two-stage latching doors, ensure that they are
completely latched to prevent wind noise and
water intrusion.
Bunk Latches
To move the lower or upper sleeper bunk (if
equipped), disengage the latch at the front of the
lower bunk, or the latches on both sides of the upper
bunk. Lock the bunks into operating position, down
for the lower bunk and up or down for the upper
bunk, by engaging both the primary and secondary
latches.
Lighting
See Chapter 5 for detailed information regarding
lighting controls.
Power Outlets
Power outlets are located underneath the lower
bunk.
Vents
To open any sleeper compartment vent, push the
vent handle outward and forward. To close the vent,
pull in and back on the front edge of the handle. Use
care to avoid pinching of fingers.
8.2
9
Engine Starting, Operation,
and Shutdown
Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown
Engine Starting
This engine chapter is to serve as a guide for best
practices only. Each engine model may have operat-
ing characteristics that are unique to that particular
engine, and will be documented in the engine manu-
facturers literature. Always refer to specific instruc-
tions and recommendations from the engine manu-
facturer.
NOTE: Before starting the engine, read Chap-
ter 4, Instruments, and Chapter 5, Driver
Controls. Read the engine manufacturers oper-
ating instructions before starting the engine. 07/19/2006 f610805
Fig. 9.1, Ignition Switch

WARNING
ent temperature. The lower the ambient tem-
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
perature, the longer the lamp will be illuminated.
air inlet opening in the air intake in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire 5. Once the gauge sweep has completed, turn the
causing serious personal injury or property ignition key to the START position. Release the
damage. key the moment the engine starts.
IMPORTANT: The starter can not be used for
priming the fuel system. If the fuel/water separa- NOTICE
tor filter is replaced, and the fuel system needs
Do not rev the engine if the oil pressure gauge
to be primed, see the engine manufacturers
indicates no oil pressure. Shut down the engine
operating instructions. if oil pressure does not build within approxi-
1. Before engine start-up, complete the pre- and mately 10 seconds. Check to determine the cause
post-trip inspections and maintenance proce- of the problem. Operating the engine with no oil
dures in Chapter 23. pressure will damage the engine.
2. Set the parking brake. 6. It is not necessary to idle the engine before en-
gaging or starting the operation, but load should
3. Place the transmission in neutral. On vehicles be applied gradually during the warm-up period
with manual transmissions, fully depress the until the oil temperature reaches 140F (60C).
clutch pedal.
7. Apply load gradually during the warm-up period.
NOTE: Depending on local jurisdictional emis-
sions regulations, vehicles may not be equipped
with the WAIT TO START lamp.
NOTICE
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and If the oil pressure gauge indicates no oil pres-
allow the gauge sweep to complete. See sure, shut down the engine within approximately
Fig. 9.1. The audible alert will sound for approxi- ten seconds to avoid engine damage.
mately four seconds. 8. Check the oil pressure gauge for any drop in
During cold conditions, the WAIT TO START pressure or mechanical malfunction in the lubri-
lamp may illuminate. Wait until the lamp goes out cating oil system. Minimum oil pressure at idle is
before turning the ignition switch to START. 7 psi (48 kPa).
NOTE: The length of time the WAIT TO START
lamp remains illuminated depends on the ambi-
9.1
Cold-Weather Starting NOTICE

See the engine manufacturers operation manual for
starting aids that are approved for specific engines. It is extremely important that the following guide-
lines be followed for engines that are equipped
Starting After Extended Shutdown with an ATS, or damage may occur to the after-
treatment device, and the warranty may be com-
Before engine start-up, complete the engine pretrip promised.
inspections in Chapter 23.
Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sul-
fur content or less.
NOTICE
Do not use fuel blended with used engine
Failure to eliminate water-diluted lubricating oil lube oil or kerosene.
may lead to serious engine damage at startup. Use only engine lube oil with a sulfated ash
An engine in storage for an extended period of time level less than 1.0 wt%.
(over winter, for example) may accumulate water in The driver should be familiar with the vehicle warning
the oil pan through normal condensation of moisture system in order to bring the vehicle to a safe stop if
on the internal surfaces of the engine. Oil diluted by the engine malfunctions. If the driver doesnt under-
water cannot provide adequate bearing protection at stand how the warning system works, an engine
start-up. For this reason, change the engine oil and shutdown could occur, causing a safety hazard. See
filters after extended storage. Chapter 10 for more information.
Engine Operation Engine Break-In

Safety and Environmental Each engine must pass a full-load operating test on
Considerations a dynamometer before shipment, thereby eliminating
the need for a break-in. Before running the engine
for the first time, follow the instructions in the manu-
WARNING facturers engine operation manual.
Do not operate the engine in an area where flam- Normal Operation
mable vapors such as gasoline or diesel fumes
are present. Shut off the engine when in an area
where flammable liquids or gases are being WARNING
handled. Failure to observe these precautions
could result in serious injury or death. Do not operate the engine in an area where flam-
mable vapors such as gasoline or diesel fumes
Once an engine is placed in service, the responsibil- are present. Shut off the engine when in an area
ity for meeting both state and local regulations is with where flammable liquids or gases are being
the owner/operator. handled. Failure to observe these precautions
IMPORTANT: Depending upon local jurisdic- could result in serious injury or death.
tional emissions guidelines, the vehicle may not Every engine has an operating range in which it per-
be equipped with an emissions aftertreatment forms most efficiently. The operating range extends
system (ATS). Adequate maintenance of the en- from maximum torque rpm at the low end, to engine
gine and the diesel particulate filter (DPF) are rated speed at the high end. Most engines deliver
the responsibility of the owner/operator, and are best fuel economy when operated in the low- and
essential to keep the emission levels low. Good mid-speed segments of the efficiency range and pro-
duce maximum horsepower at rated speed, which is
operating practices, regular maintenance, and
also the recommended maximum speed of the en-
correct adjustments are factors that will help gine. For further engine-specific information, refer to
keep emissions within the regulations. the engine manufacturers operation manual.
9.2
Prolonged idling of engines is not recommended, and Check the condition and tension of the drive
is illegal in some states. Idling produces sulfuric acid belts.
that is absorbed by the lubricating oil, and eats into
Refer to the engine manufacturers operation
bearings, rings, valve stems, and engine surfaces. If
manual for recommended heaters, low-
you must idle the engine for cab heating or cooling,
viscosity lubricating oils, winter-grade fuels,
use the high idle function of the cruise control
and approved coolants.
switches. An idle speed of 900 rpm should be
enough to provide cab heat in ambient temperatures Periodically check the coolant mixing ratio
that are above freezing. (concentration of antifreeze in the coolant). Add
If the engine is programmed with an idle shutdown more if necessary.
timer, 90 seconds before the preset shutdown time, At outside temperatures below -4F (-20C), a
the CHECK engine light will begin to flash at a rapid coolant preheater is recommended.
rate. If the position of the clutch pedal or service
brake changes during this final 90 seconds the idle A winterfront may be used to improve cab heating
shutdown timer will be disabled until reset. while idling. If a winterfront is used, at least 25% of
the grille should remain open in sectioned stripes
Cold-Weather Operation that run perpendicular to the charge air cooler tube-
flow direction. Winterfronts should only be used when
Satisfactory performance of a diesel engine operating the ambient temperature remains below 10F
in low ambient temperatures requires modification of (-12C).
the engine, surrounding equipment, operating prac-
tices, and maintenance procedures. The lower the High-Altitude Operation
temperature, the greater the amount of modification
required. For service products approved for use in Engines lose horsepower when operated at high alti-
cold weather for your engine, see the engine manu- tude because the air is too thin to burn as much fuel
facturers engine operation manual. as at sea level. This loss equals about three percent
for each 1000 ft (300 m) altitude above sea level for
If satisfactory engine temperature is not maintained, a naturally aspirated engine.
maintenance costs will increase due to greater en-
gine wear. If the engine coolant gets too cold, raw All engines used on Freightliner vehicles are altitude-
fuel will wash the lubricating oil off the cylinder walls compensated by the use of a turbocharger. This re-
and dilute the crankcase oil, causing all moving parts duces smoky exhaust at high altitudes, requires less
of the engine to suffer from poor lubrication. downshifting, and allows the engine to make better
use of its fuel. Nevertheless, shift gears as needed to
If the engine is in good mechanical condition and the avoid excessive exhaust smoke.
precautions necessary for cold-weather operation are
taken, ordinary cold weather will not cause difficulty
in starting or loss of efficiency.
Engine Shutdown
The following points are important to observe when 1. With the vehicle stopped, set the parking brake
operating in cold weather. and place the transmission in neutral.
Check for cracks in the battery cases, for cor-
rosion of the terminals, and for tightness of the NOTICE
cable clamps at the terminals.
Idle the engine one to two minutes before shut-
Charge the batteries to full capacity. Replace ting it down. After hard operation, shutting down
damaged batteries. the engine without idling may cause damage to
the turbocharger.
If equipped, turn off the load disconnect switch
after the engine is shut down to prevent battery 2. Allow the engine to idle one to two minutes be-
discharge. fore shutting it down. This allows the lubricating
oil and the coolant to carry heat away from the
Have the alternator output checked at an au-
combustion chambers, bearings, shafts, and
thorized Freightliner service provider.
seals.
9.3
NOTICE
Except in an emergency, do not shut down the
engine when the coolant temperature is above
194F (90C). To do so could damage the engine.
3. Turn off the ignition switch and shut down the
engine.
9.4
10
Optional Engine Systems
Engine ProtectionWarning and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Engine ProtectionWarning
and Shutdown
CHECK STOP
NOTE: The engine warning and shutdown sys-
tem is present on vehicles that are equipped
with an exhaust aftertreatment system (ATS).
1 2 3
The driver should be familiar with the vehicle warning 07/09/2009 f611036
system in order to bring the vehicle to a safe stop if 1. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
necessary. 2. CHECK Engine Lamp
3. STOP Engine Lamp
The engine will begin a warning and derate and/or
shutdown process if the engine coolant temperature, Fig. 10.1, Engine Warning Lamps
coolant level, engine oil pressure, or component tem-
peratures in the ATS reach preset levels. On some Do not operate the vehicle further until the problem
engines, the warning process will begin when the causing the shutdown has been corrected.
engine oil temperature, engine coolant temperature, Some vehicles may have a shutdown override
or the intake air temperature reach preset levels. De- switch, which can be used to momentarily override
troit engines may also begin the warning and shut- the shutdown sequence. This switch resets the shut-
down process if water is detected in the fuel. down timer, restoring power to the level before the
See the engine manufacturers operation manual for derate. The switch must be pressed again after five
specific details for your vehicle. See Chapter 11 for seconds to obtain a subsequent override. See
the warning and shutdown modes associated with Fig. 10.2.
the ATS.
Electronic engine protection can be specified as ei-
ther SHUTDOWN or WARNING and DERATE.
WARNING
When the STOP engine or CHECK engine lamp
illuminates, most engines are programmed to
shut down automatically within 30 seconds. The
driver must immediately move the vehicle to a
safe location at the side of the road to prevent 04/24/2012 f611177
causing a hazardous situation that could cause
bodily injury, property damage, or severe damage Fig. 10.2, Shutdown Override Switch
to the engine.
In SHUTDOWN mode, the red STOP engine lamp NOTICE
will illuminate when the problem is serious enough to
reduce power or speed. See Fig. 10.1. Engine power When a derate process takes place, get the ve-
will ramp down, then the engine will shut down if the hicle serviced immediately in order to prevent
problem continues while in derate mode. The driver severe damage to the engine.
has 30 or 60 seconds (depending on the critical fault
type) after the STOP engine lamp illuminates to Detroit engines may begin a warning and derate pro-
move the vehicle safely off the road. If the vehicle cess if water is detected in the fuel, or for high en-
cannot be moved to a safe location within that time, gine coolant temperature. In WARNING and DER-
turn the ignition switch to OFF for at least five sec- ATE mode, the CHECK engine, STOP engine, or MIL
onds, then restart the engine. Repeat this action until lamp will illuminate to indicate an engine problem
the vehicle is safely off the road. that requires service and the engine controls will
begin a derate of engine output. Continuing to run
10.1
the engine while it is in derate mode could cause

severe damage to the engine.
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor

Engine power takeoffs (PTO) tap into engine power
to run auxiliary devices, such as hydraulic pumps
that power additional equipment. The following are
general guidelines for operating a PTO.
1. Set the parking brake and put the transmission in
neutral.
2. Press the dash PTO switch. Release the switch
when the light begins to blink.
When the light illuminates steadily, the PTO is
engaged and ready to operate. In stationary
mode, the vehicle must remain in neutral with the
parking brake set.
3. To activate mobile mode, shift from neutral to
reverse, 1st, or 2nd gear. The clutch will open
and the PTO will disengage for a moment.
4. Touch the accelerator pedal to close the clutch
and engage the PTO in mobile mode. The PTO
may be operated with the transmission in neutral
or reverse, and 1st and 2nd gears only.
NOTE: Do not attempt to change gears while
the vehicle is moving. The transmission will ig-
nore the request.
5. To deactivate mobile mode, bring the vehicle to a
stop. The clutch will open and shut down power
to the PTO.
6. To resume stationary mode, shift to neutral. The
PTO will engage.
7. To deactivate PTO, press the PTO switch again.
When the light in the switch goes out, power to
the PTO is shut off.
10.2
11
Emissions Reduction
Components
Exhaust Aftertreatment System, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Emissions Reduction Components
Exhaust Aftertreatment peratures and reduce the soot trapped in the DPF to
ash. Active regen happens only when the vehicle is
System, Optional moving above a certain speed, determined by the
engine manufacturer. See your engine operation
IMPORTANT: Depending upon local jurisdic- manual for complete details. Both active and passive
tional emissions guidelines, the vehicle may not regen happen automatically, without driver input.
be equipped with an emissions aftertreatment
system (ATS). Adequate maintenance of the en-
gine and the diesel particulate filter (DPF) are
WARNING
the responsibility of the owner/operator, and are Active regeneration can occur automatically any-
essential to keep the emission levels low. Good time the vehicle is moving. The exhaust gas tem-
operating practices, regular maintenance, and perature could reach 1500F (800C), which is hot
correct adjustments are factors that will help enough to cause a fire, heat damage to objects
keep emissions within the regulations. or materials, or personal injury to persons near
the exhaust outlet. The exhaust temperature can
NOTICE remain high even after the vehicle has stopped.
When stopping the vehicle shortly after an auto-
It is extremely important that the following guide- matic regen, ensure the exhaust outlets are di-
lines be followed for engines that are equipped rected away from structures, trees, vegetation,
with an ATS, or damage may occur to the after- flammable materials, and anything else that may
treatment device, and the warranty may be com- be damaged or injured by exposure to high heat.
promised. See Regen Switches, below, for instructions on
Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sul- preventing automatic regen if necessary.
fur content or less. When operating conditions do not allow for ATD filter
Do not use fuel blended with used engine cleaning by active or passive regen, the vehicle may
lube oil or kerosene. require a driver-activated parked regen. When this
occurs, the DPF lamp illuminates, indicating that a
Use only engine lube oil with a sulfated ash regen is required. The driver must either bring the
level less than 1.0 wt%. vehicle up to highway speed to increase the load
(thus starting an active regen), or park the vehicle
IMPORTANT: See the engine manufacturers and initiate a parked regen. See Regen Switches,
operation manual for complete details and op- below, for instructions on initiating a parked regen.
eration of the ATS.
The ATS varies according to engine manufacturer Regen Switches
and vehicle configuration, but the exhaust muffler is The regen request switch, located on the dash, is
replaced by an aftertreatment device (ATD). Inside used to initiate a parked regen. See Fig. 11.1.
the ATD, the exhaust first passes over the diesel oxi-
dation catalyst (DOC), then passes through the die- Some vehicles may be equipped with a regen
sel particulate filter (DPF), which traps soot particles. request/inhibit switch. See Fig. 11.1. To stop a regen
The soot is reduced to ash during a process called in progress or prevent the start of a regen, press the
regeneration (regen). lower half of the switch. Regen will be delayed until
the switch is no longer active.
Regeneration NOTE: The regen switch can initiate a parked
The harder an engine works, the better it disposes of regen only when the DPF lamp is illuminated.
soot. If the exhaust temperature is high enough, a
process called passive regeneration (regen) occurs WARNING
as the vehicle is driven normally. However, if the en-
gine isnt running hot enough, the electronic controls During parked regen, exhaust temperatures are
may initiate an active regen, whereby extra fuel is very high and could cause a fire, heat damage to
injected into the exhaust stream to elevate filter tem-
11.1
take the parking brake off;

press and hold the regen inhibit switch until
idle returns to normal;
2 shut down the engine.
1
ATS Warning Lamps
There are three warning lamps that alert the driver of
high exhaust temperature, the need to perform a
parked regen or service the DPF, or of an engine
04/24/2012 f611175 fault that affects emissions.
1. Regen Request Switch See Fig. 11.2 for an explanation of the ATS warn-
2. Regen Request/Inhibit Switch ings, and actions required to avoid engine protection
Fig. 11.1, ATS Regen Switches sequences.
objects or materials, or personal injury to per- Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

sons near the exhaust outlet. A steadily illuminated yellow malfunction indicator
Before initiating a parked regeneration, make cer- lamp (MIL) indicates an engine fault that affects
tain the exhaust outlets are directed away from emissions. See Fig. 11.3.
structures, trees, vegetation, flammable materi-
als, and anything else that may be damaged or DPF Status Lamp
injured by prolonged exposure to high heat. When soot accumulates in the DPF and the DPF sta-
To initiate a parked regen, perform the following tus lamp illuminates, see Fig. 11.4, perform a parked
steps. regen or bring the vehicle up to highway speed to
increase the load (thus starting an active regen).
1. Park the vehicle away from all flammable materi-
als, put the transmission in neutral, and set the If the DPF status lamp blinks while the CHECK en-
parking brake. gine lamp is illuminated, initiate a parked regen im-
mediately in order to prevent an engine derate.
2. Start and warm the engine until the coolant tem-
perature is at least 150F (66C). If the red STOP engine lamp illuminates with the
blinking DPF lamp and the CHECK engine lamp,
3. Press and hold the regen request switch for five begin a parked regen in order to prevent an engine
seconds. As the regen process is initiated, en- shutdown. Park the vehicle and perform a parked
gine rpm increases and the HEST lamp illumi- regen.
nates to indicate extremely high exhaust tem-
peratures. High Exhaust System Temperature
IMPORTANT: The driver must remain with the (HEST) Lamp
vehicle during the entire regen cycle. Slow (10-second) flashing of the high exhaust sys-
4. The regen cycle will finish after 20 to 60 minutes, tem temperature (HEST) lamp indicates that a
at which time engine idle speed drops to normal parked regen is in progress, and the engines high
and the vehicle can be driven normally. The idle speed is being controlled by the engine software,
HEST lamp is extinguished when vehicle speed not the vehicle driver.
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h) or the system has Steady illumination of the HEST lamp alerts the
cooled to normal operating temperature. driver of high exhaust temperature during the regen
5. To stop a parked regen at any time during the process if the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/
process: h), or during a parked regen. See Fig. 11.5.
depress the clutch pedal or accelerator
pedal;
11.2
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION

INDICATOR WARNING
CHECK CHECK STOP
LAMP(S)
(Solid) (Flashing) (Flashing) (Flashing)
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Indicator Lamp Filter Regeneration Filter Regeneration Parked Regeneration Parked Regeneration Required HEST (High Exhaust
Message(s) Recommended Necessary Required Engine Engine Shut Down System Temperature)
Derate
Diesel Particulate Filter is reaching Filter is now Filter has reached Filter has exceeded Flashing
Filter Condition capacity. reaching maximum maximum capacity. maximum capacity. A regeneration is in
Switch.
capacity. progress.
Required Action Bring vehicle to To avoid engine Vehicle must be Vehicle must be parked and a
highway speeds to derate bring vehicle parked and a Parked Parked Regeneration or Service Solid
allow for an Automatic to highway speeds Regeneration must Regeneration must be performed. Exhaust Components
Regeneration or to allow for an be performed Check engine operators manual and exhaust gas are
perform a Parked Automatic engine will begin for details engine will shut down. at high temperature.
Regeneration. Regeneration or derate. When stationary, keep
perform a Parked away from people and
Regeneration as flammable materials
soon as possible. or vapors.
For a driver performed Parked Regeneration, vehicle must be equipped with a dash mounted Regeneration Switch.
See Engine Operators Manual for complete Regeneration Instructions.

2401583000B
06/29/2009 f080147
Fig. 11.2, ATS Warning Lamps
09/25/2006 f610814a 09/25/2006 f610815a
Fig. 11.3, Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Fig. 11.4, DPF Status Lamp
Maintenance
Authorized service facilities must perform any DPF
service. For warranty purposes, maintain a record
that includes:
date of cleaning or replacement;
vehicle mileage;
particulate filter part number and serial number.
11.3
09/25/2006 f610816a
Fig. 11.5, HEST Lamp
11.4
12
Brake System
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5
Brake System
Air Brake System releasing the spring parking brakes, make the
connection to a towing vehicle or chock the tires.
Brake System General Information After correcting the brake system problem, uncage
A dual air brake system consists of two independent the spring parking brakes before resuming normal
air systems that use a single set of brake controls. vehicle operation.
Each system has its own reservoirs, plumbing, and
brake chambers. The primary system operates the Primary Air Brake System
service brakes on the rear axle; the secondary sys- Loss of air pressure in the primary air system causes
tem operates the service brakes on the front axle. the rear service brakes to become inoperative, and
Service brake signals from both systems are sent to the parking brake to engage. The secondary air sys-
the trailer. tem will continue to operate the front brakes and the
trailer brakes (if equipped).
WARNING
Secondary Air System
Do not operate the vehicle with the front brakes Loss of air pressure in the secondary air system
backed off or disconnected. Backing off or dis- causes the front axle brakes to become inoperative.
connecting the front brakes will not improve ve- The primary air system will continue to operate the
hicle handling and may lead to loss of vehicle rear service brakes and the trailer brakes (if
control, resulting in property damage or personal equipped).
injury.
Brake System Components Brake System Operation

Before driving your vehicle, allow time for the air
The warning light and audible alert activate if air compressor to build up a minimum of 100 psi (689
pressure drops below 64 to 76 psi (441 to 524 kPa) kPa) pressure in both the primary and secondary
in either system. If this happens, check the air pres- systems. Monitor the air pressure system by observ-
sure gauges to determine which system has low air ing the air pressure gauges and the low-air-pressure
pressure. Although the vehicles speed can be re- warning light and buzzer. The warning light and
duced using the foot brake control pedal, either the buzzer shut off when air pressure in both systems
front or rear service brakes will not be operating at reaches 64 to 76 psi (441 to 524 kPa).
full capacity, causing a longer stopping distance.
Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and have the air sys- IMPORTANT: Before driving the vehicle, secure
tem repaired before continuing. all loose items in the cab so that they will not fly
IMPORTANT: In the event of a total loss of ser- forward during a full brake application. Make
vice brakes with full system air pressure, use sure all passengers are wearing seat belts.
the parking brake control valve (yellow knob) to During normal brake stops, depress the foot brake
bring the vehicle to a complete stop in the saf- control pedal until braking action slows down the ve-
est location possible. hicle. Increase or decrease the pressure on the
pedal so that the vehicle comes to a smooth, safe
Before a vehicle with insufficient system air pressure stop. Apply the spring parking brakes if the vehicle is
can be moved, the spring parking brakes must be to be parked.
released by applying an external air source at the
gladhands, or by manually caging the parking brake IMPORTANT: An air brake proportioning system
springs. may be used in tractor air brake systems when
the vehicle is not equipped with an antilock
WARNING braking system (ABS). When operating in bob-
tail mode, the rear brake chambers (on which
Do not release the spring parking brakes and the axle load has been greatly reduced) receive
then drive the vehicle. There would be no means reduced (proportional) air pressure, while the
of stopping the vehicle, which could result in se- front axle brake chambers receive full (normal)
rious personal injury or vehicle damage. Before
12.1
Brake System
air pressure. This results in a different brake

pedal "feel," as the pedal seems to require more
travel and/or effort to slow or stop the vehicle.
However, the air brake proportioning system
actually improves vehicle control when the trac-
tor is in bobtail mode. When the tractor is tow-
ing a trailer, the rear brake chambers will re-
ceive full (normal) application air pressure.
When parking a vehicle attached to a trailer that
does not have spring parking brakes, apply the trac-
tor parking brakes. Chock the trailer tires before dis-
connecting the vehicle from the trailer.
10/17/2001 f610591
WARNING Fig. 12.1, Trailer Brake Lever

If a trailer or combination vehicle is not equipped The red octagon-shaped knob in the control panel
with spring parking brakes, do not park it by pull- actuates the trailer air supply valve. See Fig. 12.2.
ing out only the trailer air supply valve knob. After the vehicles air hoses are connected to a
This would apply only the trailer service brakes. trailer and the pressure in both air systems is at least
If air were to bleed from the trailer brake system, 65 psi (448 kPa), the trailer air supply valve must be
the trailer brakes would release, possibly causing pushed in. It should stay in to charge the trailer air
an unattended runaway vehicle. supply system and to release the trailer spring park-
ing brakes.
NOTICE Pull the trailer air supply valve out before disconnect-
ing a trailer or when operating a vehicle without a
Never apply the service and spring parking trailer. If pressure in both air systems drops to 35 to
brakes simultaneously. To do so puts excessive 45 psi (242 to 310 kPa), the trailer air supply valve
input force on brake components, which could automatically pops out, exhausting the trailer air sup-
damage or cause eventual failure of brake actuat- ply, and applying the trailer service or spring parking
ing components. brakes.
Brake Controls
The trailer brake lever (hand control valve) is used 1
for applying the trailer brakes without applying the 2
truck or tractor service brakes. It is usually mounted
on the right-hand control panel. See Fig. 12.1. The
valve can be partially or fully applied, but in any par-
tially on position it will be overridden by a full applica-
tion of the service brake pedal. Moving the lever
down applies the trailer brakes, moving it up releases
them. The lever will automatically return to the up 03/10/99 f610291
position when it is released. 1. Trailer Air Supply Valve
2. Parking Brake Valve
WARNING Fig. 12.2, Brake Valves
Do not use the trailer service brakes for parking; The yellow diamond-shaped knob in the control
they are not designed for this purpose. If air panel actuates the parking brake valve. See
bleeds out of the trailer air tank during parking, Fig. 12.2. Pulling out the parking brake valve applies
the vehicle could roll, causing serious personal both the tractor and trailer spring parking brakes and
injury or property damage.
12.2
Brake System
automatically causes the trailer air supply valve to Visit a repair facility as soon as possible when
pop out. brakes equipped with automatic slack adjusters are
determined to be out of adjustment.
NOTICE
Meritor WABCO Antilock
Do not use the spring parking brakes if the ser-
vice brakes are hot, such as after descending a Braking System
steep grade. To do so could damage the brakes. The Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking System (ABS)
Allow hot brakes to cool before using the spring is an electronic wheel speed monitoring and control
parking brakes. system that works with the standard air brake sys-
Do not use the spring parking brakes during tem. ABS passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at
freezing temperatures if the service brakes are all times, and controls wheel speed during emer-
wet. To do so could cause them to freeze. If the gency stops.
brakes are wet, drive the vehicle in low gear and IMPORTANT: For proper ABS system operation,
lightly apply the brakes to heat and dry them.
do not change tire sizes. The sizes of the tires
If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking installed during production are programmed into
brakes, pulling out the parking brake valve applies the electronic control unit. Installing different-
the tractor spring parking brakes and the trailer ser- sized tires could result in a reduced braking
vice brakes. When the tractor and trailer parking force, leading to longer stopping distances.
brakes (or trailer service brakes) are both applied,
the trailer brakes are released by pushing in the ABS includes signal-generating tone wheels and sen-
trailer air supply valve, leaving the tractor parking sors located in the wheel hubs of each sensed
brakes applied. Air pressure in the primary or sec- wheel. The sensors transmit vehicle wheel speed
ondary reservoir must be at least 65 psi (448 kPa) information to an electronic control unit (located be-
before the tractor spring parking brakes, or the trailer hind the center dash). The control units main circuit
service or spring parking brakes, can be released. interprets the speed sensor signals and calculates
wheel speed, wheel retardation, and a vehicle refer-
Automatic Slack Adjusters ence speed. If the calculations indicate wheel lockup,
the main circuit signals the appropriate modulator
valve to reduce braking pressure. During emergency
WARNING braking, the modulator valve alternately reduces, in-
creases, or maintains air pressure supply in the
Manually adjusting an automatic slack adjuster to brake chamber to prevent front and rear wheel
bring the pushrod stroke within legal limits is lockup.
likely masking a mechanical problem. Adjustment
is not a repair. Before adjusting an automatic The electronic control unit (ECU) also has a safety
slack adjuster, troubleshoot the foundation brake circuit that constantly monitors the wheel sensors,
system and inspect it for worn or damaged com- traction control valve (if equipped), modulator valves,
ponents. Improperly maintaining the vehicle brak- and the electrical circuitry.
ing system may lead to brake failure, resulting in
The Meritor WABCO ABS combines one front-axle
property damage, personal injury, or death.
control channel with one rear-axle control channel to
Automatic slack adjusters should never be manually form one control circuit. For example, the sensor and
adjusted except during routine maintenance of the modulator valve on the left-front axle form a control
foundation brakes (e.g., replacing shoes), during circuit with the sensor and modulator valve on the
slack adjuster installation, or in an emergency situa- right-rear axle. If, during vehicle operation, the safety
tion. circuit senses a failure in any part of the ABS, the
When the brake pushrod stroke exceeds the legal vehicle ABS warning indicator illuminates and the
brake adjustment limit on a vehicle, there is likely a control circuit where the failure occurred is switched
mechanical problem with the foundation brake com- to normal braking action. See Fig. 12.3. The remain-
ponents or the adjuster is improperly installed. ing control circuit will retain the ABS effect. Even if
the ABS is completely inoperative, normal braking
12.3
Brake System
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11
IDLE
OPT 2 OPT 4 OPT 5 OPT 6 MGMT OPT 9
CHECK STOP ABS ABS
BRAKE
12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
05/07/2012 f611094
NOTE: Some vehicles may not be equipped with all warning indicators shown here.
1. Engine Brake 11. Trailer ABS 18. Left-Turn Signal
2. Optional 12. Low Engine Oil Pressure 19. Low Battery Voltage
3. Wait To Start 13. High Coolant Temperature 20. Water In Fuel
4. Check Transmission 14. Unfastened Seat Belt 21. Driver Message Center
5. Optimized Idle 15. Park Brake On 22. High Beams On
6. CHECK Engine 16. Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) 23. Low Air Pressure
7. STOP Engine Status 24. Cruise Control On
8. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) 17. High Exhaust Temperature 25. Right-Turn Signal
9. Vehicle ABS (HEST)
10. Transmission Overheat
Fig. 12.3, ICU3 Message Center (typical)
ability is maintained. An exception would be if a ABS cannot prevent an accident if the driver is
modulator valve (or combination modulator valve) is speeding or following too closely.
damaged and inoperative. As these components are
an integral part of the air brake system, normal brak- Trailer ABS Compatibility
ing may be impaired or inoperative.
The Meritor WABCO ABS is designed to communi-
During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully cate with a trailer ABS, if they are compatible. Com-
depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a patibility will result in the illumination of the trailer
safe stop. Do not pump the brake pedal. With the ABS warning indicator during vehicle start-up and
brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will control all fault detection. See Fig. 12.3.
wheels to provide steering control and a reduced
braking distance. The trailer ABS warning indicator will not illuminate
unless a compatible trailer is connected to the trac-
Although the ABS improves vehicle control during tor. The dash-mounted lamp will operate as follows
emergency braking situations, the driver still has the when a compatible trailer is properly connected to
responsibility to change driving styles depending on the tractor:
existing traffic and road conditions. For example, the
12.4
Brake System
When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-

tion, the trailer ABS warning indicator will illu-
minate momentarily, then turn off.
If the lamp illuminates momentarily during ve-
hicle operation, then shuts off, a fault was de-
tected and corrected.
If the lamp illuminates and stays on during ve-
hicle operation, there is a fault with the trailer
ABS. Repair the trailer ABS system immedi-
ately to ensure full antilock braking capability.
04/24/2012 f611180
IMPORTANT: If a compatible trailer is con-
nected, and the lamp is not illuminating momen- Fig. 12.4, ATC Switch
tarily when the ignition key is turned to the ON After the ignition switch is turned on, the vehicle ABS
position, it is possible that the lamp is burnt out. lamp and the WHEEL SPIN indicator lamp come on
for about three seconds. After three seconds, the
Automatic Traction Control warning lights go out if all of the tractors ABS com-
ponents are working.
Vehicles with electronic engines and ABS may have
Automatic Traction Control (ATC). On these vehicles, IMPORTANT: If any of the ABS warning lights
the ATC system automatically limits wheel spin dur- do not work as described above, or come on
ing reduced-traction situations. In normal braking ap- while driving, repair the ABS immediately to en-
plications, the standard air brake system is in effect. sure full antilock braking capability.
An additional solenoid valve is installed. During
reduced-traction situations, the ATC solenoid valve
controls air pressure to the modulator valves and
Engine Brake
they in turn increase, hold, or reduce pressure to the
appropriate brake chambers to provide better traction WARNING
whenever wheel spin occurs.
To avoid injury from loss of vehicle control, do
When the ATC system is in the NORMAL mode, it not activate the engine brake system under the
will apply gentle braking to the spinning wheel, to following conditions:
feed power to the wheel(s) with better traction. If
both wheels are spinning, the system will signal the on wet or slippery pavement, unless the
engine to reduce power. vehicle is equipped with antilock braking
system (ABS) and you have had prior expe-
ATC includes a deep snow and mud option to in-
rience driving under these conditions;
crease available traction on extra-soft surfaces like
snow, mud, or gravel. A rocker switch labeled ATC is when driving without a trailer or pulling an
located on the dash. See Fig. 12.4. Pressing the empty trailer;
switch temporarily allows more drive wheel spin. Acti-
if the tractor drive wheels begin to lock, or
vating the deep snow and mud option causes the
WHEEL SPIN lamp to flash. Pressing the switch there is fishtail motion after the engine
again cycles the system back to normal operation. brake is activated.
Each engine manufacturer uses a specific engine
NOTICE brake for their engine. Regardless of the manufac-
turer, the engine brake is operated with the principles
The deep snow and mud option is intended to be outlined in this chapter. Refer to the engine manufac-
used under specific slippery conditions that re- turers operation manual for details of their particular
quire momentary increased wheel spin. Using engine brake product.
this option for an extended period of time may
damage the vehicle brake system.
12.5
Brake System
Whenever vehicle braking is required on good road

conditions, the engine brake may be used in con- WARNING
junction with the service brakes. There is no time
limit for operation of the engine brake. However, an The engine brake must be disengaged when
engine brake does not provide the precise control shifting gears using the clutch pedal. If the en-
available from the service brakes, and is not a sub- gine brake is engaged when the transmission is
stitute for a service braking system. in neutral, the braking power of the engine brake
can stall the engine, which could result in loss of
vehicle control, possibly causing personal injury
WARNING and property damage.
Usage of the engine brake as the primary braking
system can cause unpredictable stopping dis- NOTICE
tances, that could result in personal injury or
property damage. Service brakes are the primary Do not allow the engine to exceed 2500 rpm. Se-
vehicle braking system. rious engine damage could result.
There are two switches that control the engine brake. "Control speed" is the speed at which the engine
brake performs 100 percent of the required downhill
The dash mounted ON/OFF switch (ENG braking, resulting in a constant speed of descent.
BRK), is used to turn the engine brake ON and The control speed varies, depending on vehicle
OFF. See Fig. 12.5. weight and the downhill grade.
The HI/MED/LO (in some cases HI/LO) engine For faster descent, select a higher gear than that
brake level switch on the dash, controls the used for control speed. Service brakes must then be
amount of engine braking. used intermittently to prevent engine overspeed and
to maintain desired vehicle speed.
A driver may descend slower than control speed by
1 2 selecting a lower gear, being careful not to over-
speed the engine. Occasional deactivation of the en-
gine brake may be necessary to maintain the desig-
nated road speed under these conditions.
Below a set engine temperature when the engine is
cold, the brake may be disabled depending on the
brake type.
Engine Brake Operation

08/12/2009 f611039
To activate the engine brake after the engine is
1. Engine Brake ON/OFF
warmed up and the vehicle is in motion:
2. Engine Brake Intensity Switch
Remove your feet from both the clutch and
Fig. 12.5, Engine Brake Switches throttle pedals. Press the dash-mounted ENG
BRK switch to toggle the engine brake ON.
Since the engine brake is most effective at rated en-
See Fig. 12.4.
gine speed, gear selection is very important. Gearing
down the vehicle, within the limits of the rated engine The engine brake will engage at the rate last
speed, makes the engine brake more effective. Rec- set on the brake intensity switch.
ommended engine braking speed is above 1800 rpm Move the intensity switch to the desired inten-
and below the rated speed.
sity. Depending on the engine model, LO will
provide 1/3 or 1/2 of the full braking capacity of
the engine. HI will provide maximum engine
braking.
12.6
Brake System
Use the dash-mounted switch set at the LO

position when driving on flat, open stretches of
road. If the service brakes are still required to
slow down on a grade, switch to a higher set-
ting on the dash switch, until there is no need
for the service brakes. Grade descent speed
should be such that the service brakes are
used infrequently and that they remain cool,
thus retaining their effectiveness.
For maximum retarding, maintain the top gov-
erned speed of the engine through the appro-
priate selection of gears. When shifting gears,
the engine brake will disengage when the
clutch pedal is depressed, then engage when
the clutch pedal is released.
To cancel the engine brake application, toggle
the ENG BRK switch OFF.
If the engine is equipped with both cruise control and
an engine brake, the engine brake can operate auto-
matically while in cruise control mode.
The engine brake will only operate when the accel-
erator pedal is fully released. Disengaging the clutch
will prevent the engine brake from operating.
Vehicles equipped with antilock braking systems
(ABS) have the ability to turn the engine brake off if
a wheel-slip condition is detected. The engine brake
will automatically turn itself back on once the wheel
slip is no longer detected.
12.7
13
Steering System
Steering System General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Steering System
Steering System General

Information
The power steering system includes the integral
power steering gear, hydraulic hoses, power steering
pump, reservoir, steering wheel and column, and
other components. Some models are also equipped
with a separate hydraulic power cylinder on the right
side of the front axle, or a right-hand slave gear.
The power steering pump, driven by the engine, pro-
vides the power assist for the steering system. If the
engine is not running, there is no power assist. If the
power-assist feature does not work due to hydraulic
fluid loss, steering pump damage, or some other
cause, bring the vehicle to a safe stop. Do not drive
the vehicle until the cause of the problem has been
corrected.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle without the power-assist fea-
ture of the steering system requires much greater
effort, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds,
which could result in an accident and possible
injury.
NOTICE
Never steam clean or high-pressure wash the
steering gear. Internal damage to gear seals, and
ultimately the steering gear, can result.
Drivers should carefully use the power available with
a power steering system. If the front tires become
lodged in a deep chuckhole or rut, drive the vehicle
out instead of using the steering system to lift the
tires out of the hole.
NOTICE
Avoid turning the tires when they are against a
curb, as this places a heavy load on steering
components and could damage them.
13.1
14
Manual Transmissions and
Clutch
Eaton Fuller Transmission, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Eaton Fuller Splitter and Range-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4
Manual Transmissions and Clutch
Eaton Fuller Transmission, Eaton Fuller Splitter and

Operating Tips Range-Shift Transmissions
Refer to the Eaton website for additional information, Combination splitter and range-shift transmissions
www.roadranger.com. allow the choice of two splitter ratios in each gear, as
well as the additional ratios provided by a low range
Follow these important operation principles:
and a high range.
For all conditions, use the highest gear that is
still low enough to start the vehicle moving with General Information, Range-Shift
the engine at or near idle speed, and without Transmissions
slipping the clutch excessively.
When operating on-highway with no load or IMPORTANT: Not all ratios are used in each
under ideal conditions, use 1st gear to start the range, and the shift patterns vary between
vehicle moving forward. transmissions. Read the shift pattern decal on
the dash for the operating instructions for the
When operating off-road or under adverse con-
transmission installed in your vehicle.
ditions, use LOW gear to start the vehicle mov-
ing forward. The range-preselection lever selects the low or high
range for each transmission ratio. It is used once
Use the clutch brake to stop gear rotation
during an upshift sequence and once during a down-
when shifting into LOW or reverse while the
shift sequence.
vehicle is stationary. The clutch brake is actu-
ated by depressing the clutch pedal all the way To operate a range-shift transmission, move the gear
to the floor. shift lever through all the low-range gear positions
and then pull the range-preselection lever up to
Partially disengage the clutch to break engine move into the high-range ratios.
torque during normal gear shifts.
IMPORTANT: Always preselect range shifts
Double-clutch between all upshifts and down-
when upshifting or downshifting. Preselection
shifts that require movement of the shift knob.
Splitting of gears does not require movement requires that the range lever be moved to the
of the shift knob. necessary position before starting to shift. Pre-
selecting range shifts prevents damage to the
Never push the range-preselection lever down transmission and provides for smoother shifts.
into low range while operating in high range,
except when downshifting from 5th gear to 4th General Information, Splitter Control
gear.
Do not shift from high range to low range at Depending on the transmission model, some ratios
can be split using the splitter-control button (located
high vehicle speeds.
on the side of the gear shift lever).
Never make a range shift or a splitter shift
while the vehicle is in reverse. IMPORTANT: Always preselect splitter shifts.
Preselection requires that the splitter-control
Never move the range-preselection lever with button be moved to the necessary position be-
the transmission in neutral while the vehicle is fore starting to shift. Preselecting splitter shifts
moving. allows for smoother and faster shifting. Com-
Skip ratios while shifting only when operating plete the shift immediately after preselecting the
conditions permit, depending on the load, split to avoid unnecessary wear on transmission
grade, and road speed. components.
Never coast with the transmission in neutral.
14.1
Eaton Fuller 13-Speed Splitter and 5. Upshift from LOW (or 1st gear) through 4th gear,
double-clutching when moving the gear shift
Range-Shift Transmissions lever, and accelerating to 80 percent of engine
Eaton Fuller 13-speed transmissions have thirteen governed speed.
forward speeds and two reverse speeds. Each trans- 6. While in 4th gear, pull the range-preselection
mission consists of a 5-speed front section and a lever up into high range and move the splitter-
3-speed auxiliary section. The auxiliary section con- control button to the low (rearward) position.
tains low- and high-range ratios, plus a splitter gear. Double-clutch into 5th gear, engage the clutch,
See Fig. 14.1 for the shift pattern. and accelerate.
7. Upshift progressively through the high range
Hi 5 5 7 7 1
R Dir OD Dir OD gears.
Lo 1 3
To shift from 5th direct to 5th overdrive (or 5th
underdrive to 5th direct on RT model transmis-
A sions), move the splitter-control button to the
N high position, then immediately release the ac-
celerator. Press and release the clutch pedal,
B
6 6 8 8 then, accelerate again.
LOW Dir OD Dir OD
2 4 C D
Continue upshifting through the shift pattern.
03/13/96 f260044a Double-clutch when moving the gear shift lever
A. High Range C. High (forward) (6th to 7th, etc.); single-clutch during split shifts
B. Low Range D. Low (rearward) (6th direct to 6th overdrive, etc.).
1. Splitter Control Button
Downshifting
Fig. 14.1, Eaton Fuller 13-Speed Transmission Shift
Pattern IMPORTANT: Never use the clutch brake when
downshifting, or as a brake to slow the vehicle.
LOW gear is used only as a starting gear; it is never
used with the transmission in high range. The other 1. To downshift from 8th overdrive to 8th direct (or
four ratios are used once in the low range and once 8th direct to 8th underdrive on RT model trans-
again in the high range. missions), move the splitter-control button to the
low position, then immediately release the accel-
High range gear ratios can be split by using the erator. Press and release the clutch pedal, then
splitter-control button with the underdrive ratio (RT depress the accelerator pedal once the transmis-
models), or overdrive ratio (RTO models). Low range sion has shifted.
gear ratios cannot be split.
2. Start the downshift from 8th direct to 7th over-
Upshifting drive by moving the splitter-control button to the
high position, then double-clutch into 7th gear.
1. Put the transmission in neutral. Start the engine
and bring the air system pressure up to 100 to 3. Downshift progressively through each of the high
120 psi (689 to 827 kPa). range gears, alternating the procedures in steps
1 and 2 above until reaching 5th direct.
2. Position the range-preselection lever down, in
low range. 4. When in 5th direct and ready for the downshift to
4th, push the range-preselection lever down and
3. Make sure the splitter-control button is in the low move the splitter-control button to the high posi-
(rearward) position. See Fig. 14.1. tion. Double-clutch into 4th gear, engage the
4. To start the vehicle moving, press the clutch clutch, and depress the accelerator pedal.
pedal to the floor, shift into LOW or 1st gear, 5. Continue downshifting from 4th gear to 1st gear,
then engage the clutch with the engine at or near as conditions require.
idle speed. Accelerate to 80 percent of engine
governed speed.
14.2
Eaton Fuller 18-Speed Splitter and drive (rearward) position (Fig. 14.2). Double-
clutch into 1st gear.
Range-Shift Transmissions
Eaton Fuller 18-speed transmissions have eighteen Double-clutch when moving the gear shift lever
forward speeds and four reverse speeds. Each trans- (1st to 2nd to 3rd to 4th); single-clutch during
mission consists of a 5-speed front section and a split shifts (1st direct to 1st overdrive, etc.).
4-speed auxiliary section. The auxiliary section con-
tains low- and high-range ratios, plus a splitter gear. 5. When in 4th overdrive, use the range-
See Fig. 14.2. preselection lever and the splitter-control button
to upshift to 5th gear.
1 While in 4th gear, pull the range-preselection
5 5 7 7 lever up into high range and move the splitter-
Dir OD Dir OD
R 1 1 3 3 control button to the low position. Double-clutch
Dir OD Dir OD
into 5th gear, engage the clutch, and accelerate.
A
N 6. Upshift progressively through the high range
gears.
6 6 8 8
Dir OD Dir OD B
LOW LOW
2 2 4 4 To shift from 5th direct to 5th overdrive (or 5th
Dir OD
Dir OD Dir OD underdrive to 5th direct on RT model transmis-
C D sions), move the splitter-control button to the
03/13/96 f260157a
high position, then immediately release the ac-
A. High Range C. Overdrive (forward) celerator. Press and release the clutch pedal,
B. Low Range D. Direct Drive (rearward) and accelerate.
1. Splitter Control Button
Fig. 14.2, Eaton Fuller 18-Speed Transmission Shift Double-clutch when moving the gear shift lever
Pattern (6th to 7th, etc.); single-clutch during split shifts
(6th direct to 6th overdrive, etc.).
LOW gear in the front section is used only as a start-
ing gear; it is never used when the transmission is in Downshifting
high range. LOW gear can be split, to provide both a
direct and an overdrive ratio. IMPORTANT: Never use the clutch brake when
downshifting, or as a brake to slow the vehicle.
Upshifting
1. To downshift from 8th overdrive to 8th direct (or
1. Put the transmission in neutral. Start the engine 8th direct to 8th underdrive on RT model trans-
and bring the air system pressure up to 100 to missions), move the splitter-control button to the
120 psi (689 to 827 kPa). low position, then immediately release the accel-
2. Position the range-preselection lever down, in erator. Press and release the clutch pedal, then
low range and make sure the splitter-control but- depress the accelerator pedal once the transmis-
ton is in the low position. See Fig. 14.2. sion has shifted.
3. 2. Start the downshift from 8th direct to 7th over-

To start the vehicle moving, press the clutch
pedal to the floor, shift into LOW, then engage drive by moving the splitter-control button to the
the clutch with the engine at or near idle speed. high position, then immediately double-clutch into
To shift from LOW direct to LOW overdrive, 7th gear.
move the splitter-control button into the overdrive 3. Downshift progressively through each of the high
(forward) position, then immediately release the range gears, alternating the procedures in steps
accelerator. Press and release the clutch pedal, 1 and 2 above until reaching 5th direct.
and accelerate.
4. When in 4th overdrive, push the range-
4. Upshift from LOW overdrive to 1st direct by first preselection lever down and move the splitter-
moving the splitter-control button into the direct control button to the high position. Double-clutch
14.3
through into 4th gear, engage the clutch, and 4. Upshift progressively from 1st gear through 5th
depress the accelerator pedal. gear, double-clutching when moving the gear
shift lever.
5. Continue downshifting from 4th overdrive to 4th
direct, then 4th direct to 3rd overdrive, etc. 5. When in 5th gear and ready to move to 6th gear,
Double-clutch when moving the gear shift lever pull the range-preselection lever up into the high
(4th to 3th, etc.); single-clutch during split shifts range. Double-clutch into 6th gear, engage the
(4th direct to 3rd overdrive, etc.). clutch, and accelerate.
Eaton Fuller 10-Speed Range-Shift NOTE: If after attempting to shift into the high
range the transmission remains in neutral, the
Transmissions range synchronizer protection device may be
Eaton Fuller 10-speed transmissions have ten selec- activated. Move the gear shift lever to neutral to
tive, evenly-spaced forward ratios. Each transmission allow the range shift to complete, then shift back
consists of a 5-speed front section, and a 2-speed into gear.
auxiliary section. The ten forward speeds are ob-
6. Upshift progressively through the high range
tained by twice using a 5-speed shift pattern: the first
gears, double-clutching when moving the gear
time in low range, the second time in high range.
shift lever and accelerating to 80 percent of en-
See Fig. 14.3 for the shift patterns, noting that the
4th/9th and the 5th/10th shift positions in the RT (di- gine governed speed.
rect ratio) transmissions are directly opposite in the
RTO (overdrive ratio) transmissions.
Downshifting
IMPORTANT: Never use the clutch brake when
A B downshifting, or as a brake to slow the vehicle.
Hi 7 9 Hi 7 10
R R
Lo 2 4 Lo 2 5 1. Downshift progressively through each of the high
range gears, double-clutching between shifts.
C
N N 2. When in 5th gear and ready to move to 4th gear,
push the range-preselection lever down into the
6 8 10 D 6 8 9 low range. Double-clutch into 4th gear, engage
1 3 5 1 3 4 the clutch, and depress the accelerator.
03/13/96 f260043a
3. Downshift progressively through the low range
A. RT Transmissions C. High Range gears, double-clutching when moving the gear
B. RTO Transmissions D. Low Range shift lever, as conditions require.
Fig. 14.3, Eaton Fuller 10-Speed RT and RTO
Transmissions Shift Patterns Clutch
Upshifting Clutch General Information
1. Put the transmission in neutral. Start the engine To ensure long service life of the clutch, start in the
and bring the air system pressure up to 100 to right gear, be alert to clutch malfunctions, and know
120 psi (689 to 827 kPa). when to adjust the clutch.
2. Position the range-preselection lever down, in Typical operation will not break down the clutch fric-
low range. tion surfaces. Heat and wear are almost nonexistent
when a clutch is fully engaged. However, during the
3. To start the vehicle moving, press the clutch
moment of engagement, when the clutch is picking
pedal to the floor; shift into 1st gear, then engage
up the load, considerable heat is generated. If a
the clutch with the engine at or near idle speed.
clutch slips excessively, high temperatures develop
Accelerate to 80 percent of engine governed
quickly between the flywheel, driven discs, and pres-
speed.
sure plates. An improperly adjusted or slipping clutch
14.4
can generate temperatures high enough to destroy

the clutch. NOTICE
Clutch Operation Exceeding vehicle load limits can result in dam-
age to the clutch and the entire powertrain.
Clutch Break-In
Clutch Brake
The clutch may slip for a short time while the friction
surfaces break-in on a new or newly-installed clutch. Apply the clutch brake by depressing the clutch
pedal all the way to the floor plate. The last part of
NOTICE pedal travel will compress the clutch brake plates
together, stopping the transmission input shaft. The
Do not allow the clutch to slip longer than two clutch brake stops the transmission gears from rotat-
seconds. Clutch slippage for longer than two ing in order to quickly engage a transmission gear
seconds may severely damage the clutch disc, after idling in neutral.
pressure plate, or flywheel. Damage caused by
clutch slippage due to improper break-in is not NOTICE
warrantable.
Never apply the clutch brake when making down-
During initial operation of a new vehicle or a vehicle
shifts or upshifts. If the clutch brake is applied
with a new clutch, check for clutch slippage during
when the vehicle is moving, the clutch brake will
acceleration. If the clutch slips, decelerate until the
try to stop or decelerate the vehicle, causing
clutch does not slip. Allow the clutch to cool 15 to 30
rapid wear of the clutch brake friction discs. Con-
seconds, then gradually accelerate again. If the
siderable heat will be generated, causing damage
clutch continues to slip, repeat the procedure as
to the release bearings and the transmission
many as five times. If the clutch slips after five at-
front bearings.
tempts, stop the vehicle and allow the clutch to cool
for at least one hour. Notify your Freightliner dealer Using the Clutch
of the problem.
Use the clutch pedal only when starting the engine,
Moving the Vehicle in the Proper Gear launching the vehicle from a stop, or shifting. To
launch a stationary vehicle, depress the clutch pedal
An empty vehicle can be started in a higher gear
all the way to the floor plate (see Clutch Brake
than can a partially- or fully-loaded vehicle. Select
above) and shift from neutral to a low gear. Slowly
the gear combination that allows the vehicle to start
raise your foot until the clutch starts to engage. In
moving with an idling engine or, if necessary, just
this position the clutch is starting to connect the
enough throttle to prevent stalling the engine.
transmission input shaft to the flywheel and is caus-
Gear Shifting Techniques ing the most heat and wear. Slightly increase the en-
gine speed and smoothly allow the clutch pedal to
Upshift into a higher gear only when the vehicle return to the rest position. Do not allow the clutch to
speed allows the transmission input shaft speed to remain in the partially-engaged position any longer
match the flywheel speed when engaging the clutch. than necessary to obtain a smooth start.
This technique results in the smallest speed differ-
Double-clutch to shift gears while the vehicle is mov-
ence between the clutch disc and the flywheel, and
ing. Depress the clutch pedal most of the way in, but
causes the least heat and wear on the clutch assem-
not all the way to the floor plate. Depressing the
bly. When downshifting, increase the input shaft
clutch pedal to the floor plate will engage the clutch
speed to match the flywheel by slightly revving the
brake. Shift the transmission into neutral and fully
engine.
release the clutch pedal. When upshifting, wait for
Vehicle Loading the engine speed to decrease to the road speed.
When downshifting, increase the engine speed to
Clutches are designed for specific vehicle applica- match the road speed. Fully release the clutch pedal
tions and loads. after completing the shift.
14.5
NOTICE NOTICE
Riding the clutch while driving is damaging to Operating the vehicle with incorrect free pedal
the clutch because partial clutch engagement could result in clutch damage.
causes slippage and heat. Resting your foot on
A correctly adjusted clutch must have about 3/4 inch
the clutch pedal will also put a constant thrust
load on the release bearing, thinning the bearing (19 mm) of travel at the top of its stroke before a
stronger resistance can be felt. See Fig. 14.4. If the
lubricant and increasing the wear on the bearing.
free pedal travel is less than this distance, have the
Holding the Vehicle On an Incline clutch inspected.
Always use the vehicle service brakes to prevent the Check the clutch free pedal travel daily and note it in
vehicle from rolling backwards while stopped on a the drivers report.
hill. Slipping the clutch on a hill to maintain vehicle
position will quickly damage the clutch assembly.
Coasting
Coasting with the clutch pedal depressed and the
transmission in a low gear can cause high driven
disc speed. The clutch speed can be much higher
under these conditions than when the engine is driv-
ing the clutch. This condition creates a hazardous
situation due to the lack of vehicle control and due to
the high clutch disc speed. Engaging the clutch
under these conditions can cause component dam-
age because of the shock loads to the clutch and
drivetrain.
WARNING
Always shift into the gear that is correct for the
traveling speed of the vehicle and engage the
clutch. Coasting with the clutch disengaged can
prevent engagement of the correct transmission
gear which can cause loss of vehicle control, 02/09/96 f250306
possibly resulting in personal injury or property A. Free Pedal
damage.
Fig. 14.4, Clutch Free Pedal Travel
High clutch disc speeds while coasting can also
cause the clutch facing to be thrown off the disc. Adjusting the Clutch
Flying debris from the clutch can cause injury to
persons in the cab. Clutches have an internal adjustment and external
linkage adjustment. See Group 25 of the Century
Clutch Maintenance Class Trucks Workshop Manual for clutch adjustment
procedures and specifications.
Checking the Clutch Adjustment
Report erratic clutch operation as soon as possible to NOTICE
give maintenance personnel a chance to inspect, lu-
bricate, and adjust the clutch components. Notice Operating the vehicle with the clutch improperly
any gradual decrease in the distance the clutch adjusted could result in clutch or clutch brake
pedal moves before resistance is felt. failure.
14.6
Checking the Clutch Brake Operation

Clutch brake operation can be felt as an increased
resistance as the clutch pedal approaches the bot-
tom of its stroke. If the gears grind when shifting into
first or reverse gear from neutral with the clutch
pedal fully depressed, the clutch pedal is out of ad-
justment or the clutch brake is worn and needs to be
replaced.
Lubricating the Clutch Release Bearing
NOTICE
Failure to lubricate the release bearing and link-
age as recommended could result in release
bearing and clutch damage.
On vehicles equipped with a greased release bear-
ing, the release bearing should be lubricated at regu-
lar intervals. See the Century Class Trucks Mainte-
nance Manual for intervals and procedures.
14.7
15
Automated Transmissions
Freightliner SmartShift Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Eaton Fuller UltraShift DM Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Eaton Fuller UltraShift PLUS Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Eaton Fuller AutoShift Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10
Freightliner SmartShift Shift 5 6 7

Control 4 8
3
The Freightliner SmartShift transmission control is
installed with all automated transmissions in the Ar-
gosy. It replaces the typical floor-mounted shift lever
or dash-mounted push button control. 9
1
SmartShift accepts driver requests for transmission 2
10
functions and transmits them through hard wiring to
11
the transmission control unit (TCU). SmartShift is a 12
true shift-by-wire system. 01/24/2003 f270120
SmartShift offers two main advantages over conven- To upshift manually, pull the lever up (towards the driver).
tional transmission control devices. Without a floor- To downshift manually, push the lever down (away from
the driver).
mounted shift control, usable cab space is increased.
The SmartShift control is operated by the fingers of 1. SmartShift Control Lever
2. Slide Switch (forward driving mode switch)
the drivers right hand, allowing both hands to remain
3. MAN Mode (of slide switch)
on the steering wheel. 4. AUTO Mode (of slide switch)
A two-position driving mode slide switch allows the 5. Upshift Direction
driver to choose automatic (AUTO) or manual (MAN) 6. Reverse Position (of selector switch)
7. Selector Switch
mode. See Fig. 15.1.
8. Neutral Lock Button
In AUTO mode, gears shift automatically without 9. Neutral Position (of selector switch)
driver interaction. Manual shifts are accomplished by 10. Drive Position (of selector switch)
a momentary pull or push on the control in the plane 11. Low Position (of selector switch)
12. Downshift Direction
perpendicular to the steering wheel. Pull up (toward
the driver) on the control to upshift and push down Fig. 15.1, Freightliner SmartShift Control
(away from the driver) to downshift. The control is
spring-loaded and returns to its neutral position when General Information, Ultrashift
released after an upshift or downshift.
Transmission
A four-position gear selector switch is located at the
end of the lever. See Fig. 15.1. Eaton Fuller UltraShift uses a dry clutch system
which is offered only on this automated transmission
A small neutral lock button is embedded in the gear system. The current gear is displayed on the indica-
selector switch to prevent accidental shifts into gear tor on the right-hand control panel. All forward shifts
from neutral (N). Any time you shift through neutral, can be made either manually or automatically.
press down on the neutral lock button to move the
switch from neutral to another gear, such as drive Operation, UltraShift Transmission
(D), low (L), or reverse (R). When shifting into neu-
tral, it is not necessary to press the neutral lock Automatic and Manual Modes
button. The SmartShift control lever has a slide switch lo-
cated on the body of the control lever just before the
Eaton Fuller UltraShift DM paddle widens out. See Fig. 15.2. The slide switch
Transmission controls the forward driving mode, automatic (AUTO)
or manual (MAN).
Refer to the Eaton website for additional information, To change mode at any time, move the slide switch
www.roadranger.com. in the desired direction. This allows the driver to re-
spond to a wide range of driving conditions, such as
blind corners, tight curves, and steep hills.
15.1
new (target) gear, the gear indicator flashes the num-

ber of the target gear.
When the shift is complete, the gear indicator dis-
plays the new gear, without flashing.
Automatic Mode (AUTO)

In automatic drive mode (AUTO), upshifts and down-
1 2 shifts are made by the transmission without driver
intervention. Press the neutral lock button, move the
3 gear selector switch to drive (D), and depress the
accelerator pedal. The transmission will shift auto-
matically.
If driving conditions require, it is still possible to re-
quest a manual shift. The transmission will make the
shift if the engine speed is within 75 rpm of the load-
01/21/2004 f270079c based shift point for that gear.
1. Driving Mode Slide 2. Gear Selector Switch
Switch 3. Neutral Lock Button If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal after a
manual downshift in automatic mode, the transmis-
Fig. 15.2, Shift Controls and Indicators sion will upshift again if the TCU requires it.
IMPORTANT: In either mode, it is possible to Manual Mode (MAN)
shift manually by moving the lever up or down
In manual drive mode (MAN), upshifts and down-
as needed. When the engine speed is within 75 shifts are made by the driver.
rpm of the load-based shift point for an auto-
matic shift, the TCU will advance the shift. To upshift, pull the lever up (towards the
driver).
In either mode, the gear indicator displays the cur-
rent gear. See Fig. 15.3. To downshift, push the lever down (away from
the driver).
The system will hold the current gear until the driver
requests a shift. In downhill situations in particular,
the driver must be alert to vehicle speed by down-
shifting and/or using the service brakes as needed.
A shift request will be refused if the selected gear
would cause engine overspeed or excessive lugging.
Start Up
1. With the parking brake set, select neutral (N) by
moving the gear selector switch to the N posi-
tion.
2. Turn on the ignition switch. The CHECK TRANS
10/13/2003 f610680
and TRANS TEMP lamps illuminate and go out
NOTE: The gear indicator displays the current gear. In again (bulb check).
this example, it displays first gear.
The gear indicator shows the dot display, ar-
Fig. 15.3, Gear Indicator: Current Gear ranged in a square pattern. All dots in the pattern
should illuminate, without gaps or spaces. See
At the start of a shift, the current gear continues to
Fig. 15.4.
display until the transmission has been pulled into
neutral. As the transmission is synchronizing for the
15.2
Hills and Grades
WARNING
When starting or stopping on hills and grades,
use extra care to prevent the vehicle from rolling
back. A rollback accident could cause death, seri-
ous personal injury, or property damage.
Prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when
stopped on a hill or grade, or when the vehicle is
starting from a stop on a hill or grade. To start from a
full stop on a hill or grade, quickly move your foot
from the brake pedal and depress the accelerator
10/13/2003 f610678 pedal firmly. On steep hills, set the parking brake,
and release it only when there is enough engine
Fig. 15.4, Gear Indicator: Engine Start Up Dot Display
power to prevent rollback.
3. Wait for the gear indicator to show a solid N. See To stop on a hill or grade, depress and hold the
Fig. 15.5. When the N is solid (not flashing), the brake pedal to keep the vehicle from moving. When
TCU is powered up. Apply the service brake and parking, chock the tires, front and/or rear.
start the engine.
NOTICE
Never hold a hill with the accelerator pedal. Oper-
ating the vehicle too long between engine idle
and 1000 revolutions per minute (rpm) during
takeoff will cause the clutch to overheat.
Selecting Gears
Neutral
IMPORTANT: Always start the engine with the
transmission in neutral (N), the parking brake
set, and the service brakes applied.
10/13/2003 f610679 N is located directly below R on the four-position
gear selector switch on the SmartShift control lever.
Fig. 15.5, Gear Indicator: Neutral To select N, move the gear selector switch to the po-
sition below R. When neutral is selected, the letter N
NOTE: When D is selected, the TCU starts in displays on the gear indicator. See Fig. 15.5.
second gear. If desired, the driver can select to
start in first. No other start gear is available. WARNING
4. Press the neutral lock button and move the gear
selector switch forward to the D position below Do not coast in neutral. Coasting in neutral can
neutral. The current gear is displayed on the cause an accident, possibly resulting in severe
gear indicator. personal injury or death.
5. Release the parking and service brakes and de- Neutral is always available during operation, what-
press the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle ever the vehicle speed. When in neutral, requests to
to move forward. The vehicle will not move until upshift or downshift are ignored. If the gear selector
the pedal is depressed. switch is moved from N to D while the vehicle is
15.3
moving, the transmission will shift into a gear within manually between them, use the control lever as de-
the engines operating speed range. scribed for MAN mode. There is no AUTO mode for
reverse.
When shifting from neutral, always depress the brake
pedal. If the brake pedal is not pressed, the trans- When Reverse Low is selected, the letter R displays
mission will not shift, the current gear display will on the gear indicator. When Reverse High is se-
flash N, and an audible alert will sound. To reset the lected, the letter H displays on the gear indicator.
transmission, return the gear selector switch on the See Fig. 15.6.
SmartShift lever to N and attempt the shift again, this
time with the brake pedal pressed.
Before shutting down the engine, return the gear se-
lector switch to N. When the ignition is turned off, the
transmission will reset to neutral in a few minutes
regardless of the position of the gear selector switch.
Drive
Drive (D) is located directly below N on the four-
position gear selector switch on the SmartShift con-
trol lever. To select D, press in the neutral lock button
and move the gear selector switch to the position
below N. When D is selected, the number of the cur-
rently selected forward gear displays on the gear in-
10/14/2003 f610681
dicator. See Fig. 15.3.
When in drive, requests to upshift or downshift are Fig. 15.6, Gear Indicator: Reverse Low Gear
enabled. Either manual or automatic mode can be
selected on the slide switch. IMPORTANT: Under normal conditions, do not
select reverse with the vehicle moving forward.
The default starting gear is second, but first can be
selected by the driver, if desired. To change the start- The vehicle must be moving at less than two miles
ing gear, depress the brake pedal and select D with per hour (3 km/h) before selecting reverse. If reverse
the vehicle stopped. The gear indicator will display is selected when the vehicle is moving faster, an au-
the starting gear. Move the control lever up or down dible alert will sound and continue sounding at three-
until the desired starting gear is displayed. second intervals until the gear selector switch is re-
turned to the D position or the vehicle slows to the
The TCU adapts to the working conditions of each proper speed.
vehicle and its driver. After engine start up or a load
change, it needs to learn the new conditions. While If necessary to rock the vehicle, use the gear selec-
learning, it may hold a gear too long before upshift- tor switch to shift back and forth at low speed be-
ing. Start the upshift manually. It may take three or tween reverse and drive.
four shifts before UltraShift succeeds in learning the
new load-based shift points, but after that it will Low
handle the shifting automatically. Low (L) is located at the lower end of the four-
Reverse trol lever. To select L, press in the neutral lock button
Reverse (R) is located at the upper end of the four- and move the gear selector switch to the position
position gear selector switch on the SmartShift con- below D.
trol lever. To select R, press in the neutral lock button When in low, the current gear is maintained. Re-
and move the gear selector switch up to the position quests to upshift are not enabled.
above neutral.
IMPORTANT: If the engine is approaching over-
The UltraShift transmission has two reverse gears:
speed, the TCU will override the current gear
Reverse Low (RL) and Reverse High (RH). To shift
setting and upshift to prevent engine damage.
15.4
To enhance engine braking, downshifts are per- Before starting down a hill, slow down. Downshift to
formed at higher rpm than normal. a speed that you can control without hard pressure
on the service brakes.
If L is selected from neutral while stopped, the ve-
hicle starts in first gear and stays there until the en- Before entering a curve, slow down to a safe speed.
gine approaches overspeed. Downshift if necessary. This lets you use some
power through the curve to help the vehicle be more
Upshifting stable on the turn. It also allows you to regain speed
faster as you come out of the curve.
To request an upshift with the transmission in drive,
pull the control lever up (towards the driver). If the Shutdown
gear is available, the transmission will upshift and the
new gear will display on the gear indicator. Skip 1. Apply the service brakes.
shifts are not available while upshifting. Upshifts are
2. Move the gear selector switch to the N position.
not available in low, except to prevent engine over-
When the N on the gear indicator is solid (not
speed.
flashing), the TCU is ready to shut down.
If the transmission does not upshift quickly enough
3. Set the parking brake.
after engine start up or a load change, begin the shift
manually. The TCU will learn the new load-based 4. Turn off the ignition key and shut down the
shift conditions after three or four shifts. engine.
If the gear requested is unavailable, a tone will
sound. An unavailable request to upshift is not stored Ultrashift Diagnostics
in memory; the upshift must be requested again. Clutch Protection Fault
Downshifting Even though a vehicle with an UltraShift transmission
does not have a clutch pedal, it does have a me-
To request a downshift with the transmission in drive chanical clutch. As you slowly increase and decrease
or low, push the control lever down (away from the engine rpm from a stop, the mechanical clutch is en-
driver). If the gear is available, the transmission will gaging and disengaging, just like slipping the clutch
downshift and the new gear will display on the gear with a manual transmission. Excessive clutch slip-
indicator. Skip shifts are available while downshifting. page creates heat and reduces the life of the clutch.
For best engine braking, select low while moving. In These are some conditions which can cause clutch
low, downshifts are performed at higher rpm than in damage:
drive. Using the accelerator to hold the vehicle on a
IMPORTANT: If the engine is approaching over- hill
speed, the TCU will override the current gear Starting the vehicle from a stop in a gear thats
setting and upshift to prevent engine damage. too high
If the gear requested is unavailable, a tone will Overloading the vehicle
sound. An unavailable request to downshift is not
Using high idle with the vehicle in gear
stored in memory; the downshift must be requested
again. The TCU is programmed to prevent clutch damage.
When the clutch overheats, the following alerts take
When coasting to a stop, the TCU may not finish the
place:
downshift until the driver depresses the accelerator
pedal again. The TRANS TEMP light comes on
IMPORTANT: A downshift request can never The gear indicator displays "C," then "A"
result in a shift into neutral, even if the vehicle is A warning tone sounds at one-second intervals
in the drive position in the lowest possible gear.
The alerts continue until the clutch cools, the accel-
erator is released, or the clutch is fully engaged.
15.5
System Problem 3. Depress the brake pedal and release the parking
brake.
In the event of a problem, complete the following
steps. 4. Make sure the gear selector switch is positioned
on N, then turn on the ignition key. Do not at-
1. Note the driving conditions at the time the prob- tempt to start the engine yet.
lem occurred.
5. If necessary to get the transmission to shift into
2. Record the status of the transmission at the time neutral, release the pressure on the brake pedal
of the problem (AUTO or MAN mode, gear set- slightly.
ting, current gear, engine speed, etc.).
6. Once the TCU reaches neutral, a solid N will ap-
3. Complete the transmission reset procedure. pear on the gear indicator and the vehicle will
start. Apply the service brakes and start the en-
Transmission Reset Procedure gine.
In some cases, proper transmission operation can be 7. If the gear indicator continues to display a dash,
restored by resetting the TCU. Use the following pro-
contact an authorized Freightliner or Eaton ser-
cedure to reset the TCU.
vice facility.
1. When it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
2. Select N by moving the gear selector switch to Eaton Fuller UltraShift PLUS
N. Transmission
Refer to the Eaton website for additional information,
4. Shut down the engine. www.roadranger.com.
5. Wait at least two minutes. Eaton Fuller UltraShift PLUS automated transmis-
sions use shift selection software and electric clutch
6. Restart the engine. actuation; a clutch pedal is not needed to operate the
7. If the problem continues or the transmission vehicle. The current gear is displayed on the indica-
doesnt achieve neutral after engine start up, tor on the right-hand control panel. All forward shifts
contact an authorized Freightliner or Eaton ser- can be made either manually or automatically.
vice facility.
Engine Start Up
Locked In Gear
NOTE: Engine cranking is delayed until the
If the vehicle is shut down in gear, the transmission transmission power-up is complete and the gear
may become locked in gear. The transmission will display shows a solid "N".
attempt to get to neutral during the next engine start
up if the gear selector switch is positioned on N. If 1. With the parking brake set, turn the ignition
neutral cant be achieved, a dash () will appear on switch to the ON position.
the gear indicator when the vehicle is restarted.
2. Start the engine.
NOTE: If the transmission becomes locked in 3. Apply the service brake.
gear while the vehicle is moving, increased
braking effort may be required to stop the ve- NOTE: If the service brake is not applied while
hicle. selecting a starting gear, the initial start gear will
not be found and the driver will need to select
If the gear indicator displays a dash during engine
Neutral and depress the service brake while se-
start up with the gear selector switch in neutral, com-
plete the following steps. lecting the desired mode.
1. Make sure the parking brake is set. 4. Select the desired mode and starting gear. (Inap-
propriate start gear selections are ignored to
2. Turn off the ignition and wait at least two min- avoid damaging the transmission.)
utes.
15.6
5. Release the parking brake. gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes,
6. Release the service brake and apply the accel- and select the desired mode again.
erator. In Drive, the start gear is automatically selected. The
selected start gear can vary depending on several
Engine Shutdown vehicle inputs such as load, grade, and axle/
transmission ratio. The start gear can be changed
1. Select Neutral on the shift control. using the SmartShift control, provided the selected
NOTE: If the gear display does not show a solid gear would allow the vehicle to launch without dam-
"N", neutral has not yet been obtained. Neutral aging the transmission. If the start gear is changed
should always be reached before powering using the SmartShift control, it will be the default until
the vehicle is powered down or the selection is
down an UltraShift PLUS, except in cases of
changed again manually.
emergency.
IMPORTANT: Prior to ascending a steep grade,
either reduce the default start gear by one
3. Turn off the ignition, and shut down the engine. (using the SmartShift control) or apply full
throttle for the duration of the grade so the ve-
Reverse hicle maintains the proper engine and vehicle
NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral speed during the entire grade.
mode without applying the service brakes, the In Drive, the transmission automatically performs up-
transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into shifts and downshifts. However, when the transmis-
gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes, sion is near the shift point, the shift can be forced
and select the desired mode again. Also, the using the upshift or downshift function of the Smart-
vehicle will not engage reverse above 2 mph (3 Shift control.
km/h). NOTE: The transmission may deny a shift while
Reverse ) is at the upper end of the four-position ascending or descending a grade if the load of
selector switch located at the end of the SmartShift the vehicle and grade of the terrain in combina-
control. To select R, press in the neutral lock button tion with the drivetrain ratio and engine torque
and move the selector switch to the position above fall outside of the acceptable range to perform a
neutral. The default Reverse gear is engaged. shift. If the shift is denied, a tone will sound.
NOTICE Manual Mode (MAN)

In manual mode (MAN), the driver selects upshifts
Avoid launching the vehicle in high range.
and downshifts instead of letting the UltraShift PLUS
Launching the vehicle in high range increases
select them automatically. Manual shifting may be
the likelihood of clutch abuse and could be detri-
helpful when traversing a work site, railroad tracks,
mental to clutch life.
or steep grades, for example. To drive forward, press
in the neutral lock button, move the selector switch to
Automatic Mode (AUTO) Drive (D), and depress the accelerator pedal. To up-
In automatic drive mode (AUTO), upshifts and downshift, pull the lever up (towards you); to downshift,
shifts are made by the UltraShift PLUS without driver push the lever down (away from you). The system
intervention. Press in the neutral lock button, move holds the current gear unless a shift is requested or
the selector switch to Drive (D), and depress the ac- if the system initiates a manual mode override.
celerator pedal. The transmission will shift automati- NOTE: The transmission may deny a shift while
cally.
ascending or descending a grade if the load of
NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral the vehicle and grade of the terrain in combina-
mode without applying the service brakes, the tion with the drivetrain ratio and engine torque
transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into
15.7
fall outside of the acceptable range to perform a Clutch Abuse Protection

shift. If the shift is denied, a tone will sound.
Although a vehicle equipped with an UltraShift PLUS
NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral uses an automated clutch, the clutch can still over-
mode without applying the service brakes, the heat and slip with improper use. The clutch abuse
transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into protection feature helps protect the clutch if the auto-
gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes, mated clutch starts to overheat. When the clutch
and select the desired mode again. abuse protection feature initiates and sounds a warn-
ing tone, full clutch actuation must be completed
Manual Mode Override quickly. If it is not completed quickly enough, the sys-
tem will either open the clutch (if the accelerator
The system is equipped with a manual mode over- pedal is not being pressed) or close the clutch (if the
ride function. If the vehicle is being "back driven" (for accelerator pedal is being pressed). If the abuse con-
example, descending a grade and vehicle speed ex- tinues, the system will open the clutch and take away
ceeds engine speed) and the engine speed is exces- throttle control briefly to allow the clutch to cool
sively high, the system will upshift automatically. down.
Also, if the start gear is changed and it causes the
engine to lug at takeoff, the system will override the To protect the clutch:
current position and select the best available gear. Select the lowest possible start gear for the
application.
Low (L) Use Creep Mode when appropriate.
Low (L) is at the lower end of the four-position selec-
Use the service brakes and the Hill Start Aid
tor switch located at the end of the SmartShift con-
when launching on a grade.
trol. Use Low when wanting to maximize engine
braking and minimize the use of the brake pedalfor Minimize the time it takes to engage the clutch
example, when driving down long grades or when from rest.
coming to a stop. To select Low, press in the neutral
lock button and move the selector switch to the L Do not use the throttle to hold the vehicle on a
position. The lowest available start gear will be se- grade; use the service brakes.
lected (the starting gear cannot be changed in Low). Do not use the throttle to stop roll back on an
If Low is selected while moving, the transmission will incline after Hill Start Aid disengages; use the
not upshift (unless the system initiates a Low over- service brakes, and then relaunch.
ride). The system will downshift at the earliest oppor- Do not continually start and stop, especially
tunity to provide maximum engine braking. when loaded; use a lower gear or Creep Mode.
NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral
mode without applying the service brakes, the Creep Mode
transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into The Creep Mode function allows the vehicle to main-
gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes, tain a constant speed at engine idle without the
and select the desired mode again. driver holding the accelerator pedal position. This
mode is useful for very low-speed maneuvering and
Low Override applications where steady vehicle speed is required.
The vehicle speed is determined by the selected
The system is equipped with a Low override function.
gear ratio operating at governed low engine idle
If the vehicle is being "back driven" (for example, de-
speed. Any available gear may be selected, though
scending a grade and vehicle speed exceeds engine
the transmission will downshift or exit Creep Mode to
speed) and the engine speed is excessively high, the
prevent stalling if the engine lugs due to load condi-
system will upshift automatically. Also, if the start
tions.
gear is changed and it causes the engine to lug at
takeoff, the system will override the current position
and upshift.
15.8
By default, Creep Mode can be activated while in Shuttle Shifting

Manual Mode or Low. Eatons ServiceRanger diag-
nostic software can be used to enable Creep Mode Shuttle shifting from reverse to any forward mode is
in Automatic Mode and/or Reverse. only allowed if the vehicle speed is approximately
zero.
Engaging Creep Mode
To engage Creep Mode:
Auto Start Gear Selection and
Override
1. Select Low or Manual Mode and the desired
gear (while stopped or moving). The UltraShift PLUS system uses various inputs to
automatically select the best start gear in Drive and
2. Apply the accelerator pedal to accelerate the ve- Manual. This selection can be changed using the
hicle until the clutch is closed (engaged). SmartShift control; however, if the selection re-
3. Release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will quested could cause damage or engine lugging, the
continue moving at governed low engine idle request will be denied and a tone will sound.
speed.
Skip Shifting
Exiting Creep Mode
When appropriate, the UltraShift PLUS system may
To exit Creep Mode, apply the accelerator pedal to skip shift in Drive. When prevailing conditions like
accelerate temporarily, or select a higher gear in load and grade allow, skip shifts can be performed in
Manual Mode. (Creep Mode can be resumed in the Manual mode using the SmartShift control.
selected gear by releasing the accelerator pedal.)
NOTE: The transmission will exit Creep Mode if
Auto Neutral
the engine lugs 150 rpm below the governed The UltraShift PLUS system will automatically shift to
low engine idle speed. In this case, a lower gear neutral if the vehicle is left in Drive and the parking
should be selected if available. brake is set. "AN" will show on the gear display. To
re-engage the transmission, select Neutral and then
Hill Start Aid either Drive or Reverse on the shift control (it will re-
engage regardless of whether the parking brake is
UltraShift PLUS transmissions are equipped with a released).
Hill Start Aid (HSA) feature to prevent the vehicle
from rolling while on grades steeper than 3% and Automatic Traction Control
allow for a controlled launch. A grade sensor is used
to determine when to engage the feature. The UltraShift PLUS system requires the Automatic
Traction Control (ATC) option to be enabled when
HSA is "on" by default. It can be turned off by press- driving in soft soil/sand to prevent wheel slippage
ing and releasing the override switch on the dash and shifting issues. The ATC system has two modes:
(see Chapter 5). HSA will turn back on after the first "normal" (for sand and loose road surface) and a
successful launch. mud/snow setting.
When the vehicle is stopped on a grade greater than
3% and in a forward mode or reverse, depress the ATC Normal Mode
service brakes then release them. The vehicle will In normal mode, the system will engage the brakes
begin to move after 3 seconds, and the clutch will on the wheel or side that the wheel slip is occurring
perform partial engagements to slow the vehicle mo- to help the vehicle gain traction. The point at which
tion. Either step on the brake or apply the throttle to the traction control will actuate the braking system
continue negotiating the grade. increases with throttle: low throttle allows the system
to brake the wheels earlier; heavy/full throttle raises
Engine Overspeed Protection the point of the acceptable wheel slip.
The system will upshift if necessary to prevent en- Adhere to the following points when driving in ATC
gine overspeed in Drive, Manual, and Low. normal mode:
15.9
If using Automatic mode in soft soil and/or engine controller when to break torque and the en-
sand, maintain the engine speed between gine controller automatically increases or decreases
1000 and 1300 rpm to prevent unnecessary engine speed. When engine speed is correct, the
upshifting. transmission engages the next gear and signals the
engine controller to resume operation.
If using Manual mode in soft soil and/or sand,
do not attempt an upshift and try to maintain
the current gear.
Operation, AutoShift Transmission
If the vehicle comes to a stop in the sand it Automatic and Manual Modes
may be necessary to back up prior to attempt- The SmartShift control lever has a slide switch con-
ing forward movement. trols the forward driving mode, automatic (AUTO) or
manual (MAN). See Fig. 15.2.
ATC Mud/Snow Mode
To change mode at any time, move the slide switch
To select the mud/snow mode, depress the ATC in the desired direction. This allows the driver to re-
switch (see Chapter 5). This mode raises the wheel spond to a wide range of driving conditions, such as
slip speed that is allowed before the traction control blind corners, tight curves, and steep hills.
activates. The point at which the traction control will
actuate the braking system increases with throttle: In either mode, the gear indicator displays the cur-
low throttle allows the system to brake the wheels rent gear. See Fig. 15.3.
earlier; heavy/full throttle raises the point of the ac- At the start of a shift, the current gear continues to
ceptable wheel slip. display until the transmission has been pulled into
neutral. As the transmission is synchronizing for the
Load-Based Shifting new (target) gear, the gear indicator flashes the num-
The UltraShift PLUS system is adaptive and will ber of the target gear.
change the shift points based on grade, engine RPM, When the shift is complete, the gear indicator dis-
throttle position, and vehicle load. After changing plays the new gear, without flashing.
loads or powering up, the system needs to relearn
these inputs for the first few shifts to make the Automatic Mode
proper adjustments. In automatic drive mode, upshifts and downshifts re-
quire no driver interaction. Press in the neutral lock
Coasting button, move the gear selector switch to drive (D),
When coasting to a stop on level terrain, the Ultra- depress the clutch to engage the gear selected, re-
Shift PLUS system may not downshift into the lower lease the clutch, and depress the accelerator pedal.
gears. It will select a gear after the throttle is applied. The transmission will shift automatically based on
vehicle and transmission conditions.
Eaton Fuller AutoShift If the vehicle is stopped while in drive, pull up or
push down on the SmartShift control lever to change
Transmission the starting gear.
Refer to the Eaton website for additional information, If driving conditions require, it is possible to request a
www.roadranger.com. manual shift. The transmission will make the shift if
the engine speed is within 75 rpm of the load-based
General Information, AutoShift shift point for that gear.
Transmission
Manual Mode
Eaton Fuller AutoShift transmissions have ten or In manual drive mode (MAN), upshifts and down-
eighteen forward speeds and two reverse speeds. shifts are made by the driver. Manual mode should
The driver must use the clutch to start and stop the be used whenever you want to select the shifts in-
vehicle. However, the driver does not need to use stead of letting the transmission shift automatically.
the clutch to shift gears. The transmission signals the
15.10
To upshift, pull the lever up (towards the driver). To 3. The number of the gear selected will flash on the
downshift, push the lever down (away from the gear indicator until the driver releases the clutch.
driver). The system will hold the current gear until the This gear will be stored in memory as the default
driver requests a shift. In downhill situations in par- starting gear until either a different starting gear
ticular, the driver must be alert to vehicle speed by is selected by the driver or the engine is shut
downshifting and/or using the service brakes as down.
needed.
NOTE: The transmission may also be pro-
A shift request will be refused if the selected gear grammed so that it is not possible to select a
would cause engine overspeed or excessive lugging. starting gear other than the preprogrammed de-
If the vehicle is stopped while in drive, pull up or fault starting gear.
push down on the SmartShift control lever to change
the starting gear. Upshifting
NOTE: With the transmission in drive in the au-
Engine Start Up
tomatic mode, upshifts require no driver interac-
1. With the parking brake set, select neutral (N) by tion.
moving the gear selector switch to the N posi-
tion. 1. With the transmission in drive in the manual
mode, pull the control lever up (towards the
2. Depress the clutch pedal all the way down to the driver) to upshift. If the requested gear is avail-
floor. able, the transmission will upshift and the new
3. Start the engine. The CHECK TRANS and gear will display on the gear indicator.
TRANS TEMP lamps illuminate and go out again NOTE: Two consecutive, momentary upward
(bulb check). pulls will cause a skip shift when the next two
4. Release the clutch to allow the speed sensor on higher gears are available and conditions are
the input shaft to get a reading. appropriate.
5. Depress the clutch again and release the parking 2. To skip shift, move the control twice in less than
and service brakes. -second. The number of the gear engaged will
appear on the gear indicator.
6. Select the desired starting gear.
NOTE: The Eaton Fuller AutoShift transmission
7. Release the clutch.
is able to perform triple upshifts when the next
Selecting a Starting Gear three higher gears are available and conditions
are appropriate. To triple-shift, move the control
1. In automatic mode, select drive (D) by sliding the three times in less than -second.
gear selector switch downward to the next posi-
tion below the neutral position. If the gear requested is unavailable, a tone will
sound. An unavailable requested upshift is not
2. Depress the clutch to engage the gear selected.
stored in memory; the upshift must be re-
Release the clutch and drive the vehicle.
quested again.
Changing the Default Starting Gear
Downshifting
To select a starting gear other than the default start-
ing gear, follow the instructions below. NOTE: With the transmission in drive in the au-
tomatic mode, downshifts require no driver inter-
1. Make sure the vehicle is stopped and in drive. action.
2. In either automatic or manual mode, pull upward 1. With the transmission in drive in the manual
(to increase) or push downward (to decrease) on mode, push the control lever down (away from
the SmartShift control lever. Each pull upward on the driver) to downshift. If the requested gear is
the control increases the starting gear by one available, the transmission will downshift.
gear, but no higher than fourth gear.
15.11
NOTE: Two consecutive, momentary downward button and move the gear selector switch upward to
pushes will cause a skip shift, when the next the position above neutral and depress the clutch
two lower gears are available and conditions are pedal.
appropriate. NOTE: AutoShift transmissions have a dual-
2. To skip shift, move the control lever two times in range reverse. Reverse Low (RL) is the default
less than -second. The number of the gear en- reverse gear.
gaged will appear on the gear indicator. Select Reverse High (RH) by pulling upward on the
NOTE: The Eaton Fuller AutoShift transmission SmartShift control lever. When Reverse Low is se-
is able to perform triple downshifts when the lected, the letter R displays on the gear indicator.
next three lower gears are available and condi- When Reverse High is selected, the letter H displays
tions are appropriate. To triple shift, move the on the gear indicator. See Fig. 15.6.
control lever three times in less than -second. NOTE: Reverse may be engaged below a pro-
If the gear requested is unavailable, a tone will grammable forward speed in order to rock the
sound. An unavailable requested downshift is vehicle. If reverse is selected above the pro-
stored in memory and the shift will be made grammed forward speed, an audible warning will
when the gear is available. The time limit for this sound indicating that the gear is not available.
memory is a programmable parameter. Low Gear Operation
Neutral Use low (L) to maximize engine braking and mini-
mize the use of the brake pedal. It is most useful
N is located directly below R on the four-position
when descending steep hills or when coming to a
gear selector switch on the SmartShift control lever.
stop. Engine speed will be increased by 200 rpm and
To select N, move the gear selector switch to the po-
shift points will be offset by 200 rpm. The efficiency
sition below R. When neutral is selected, the letter N
of the exhaust brake will be maximized.
displays on the gear indicator. See Fig. 15.5.
Low (L) is located at the lower end of the four-
NOTE: Neutral is always available during operation.
When in neutral, upshift and downshift requests are
trol lever. To select L, press the neutral lock button
ignored. If the gear selector switch is moved from
neutral (N) to drive (D) while the vehicle is moving,
below D.
the transmission will shift into the gear that is appro-
priate for the road speed of the vehicle.
Drive
Drive (D) is located directly below N on the four-
trol lever. To select D, press the neutral lock button
below N. When D is selected, the number of the cur-
rently selected forward gear displays on the gear in-
dicator. See Fig. 15.3.
When in drive, requests to upshift or downshift are
enabled. Either manual or automatic mode can be
selected on the slide switch.
Reverse
Reverse is located at the upper end of the four-
trol lever. To select reverse, press the neutral lock
15.12
16
Drive Axle Feature Operation
Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Interaxle Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Differential Lock
The driver-controlled differential lock feature (side-to-
side wheel lock, traction control, or traction equalizer)
provides maximum traction for slippery conditions by 1
forcing the wheels on each drive axle governed by
the switch to rotate together. When the differential
lock is engaged, the clutch collar completely locks
the differential case, gearing, and axle shafts to-
gether, maximizing the traction of both wheels.
2
Differential Lock Switches
There are several differential lock options available:
a switch to control the differential lock on the
forward drive axle. 3
middle drive axle.
rearmost drive axle (see Fig. 16.1, Item 3).
4
Differential Lock Operation
NOTE: On some vehicles, the differential lock
system is connected through the low speed
range of the transmission. If this system is used,
the transmission must be in the low speed
range for the wheels to fully lock. In addition, 01/05/2012 f611158
shifting out of low speed range will also disen- 1. Interaxle Lock Switch
gage the differential lock. 2. Fifth Wheel Slide Switch
3. Rearmost Axle Differential Lock Switch
4. Air Suspension Dump Control Switch
WARNING
Fig. 16.1, Axle and Suspension Switches
Locking the wheels when the vehicle is traveling
2. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the ac-
down steep grades or when the wheels are slip-
ping could damage the differential and/or lead to celerator to relieve torque on the gearing, allow-
loss of vehicle control, causing personal injury ing the differential to fully lock.
and property damage.
WARNING
NOTICE Be especially careful when driving under slippery
Engage the differential lock only when the ve- conditions with the differential locked. Though
hicle is stopped or moving at less than 5 mph (8 forward traction is improved, the vehicle can still
km/h). Engaging the differential lock at high slip sideways, causing possible loss of vehicle
speeds can cause internal axle damage. control, personal injury, and property damage.
1. With the engine running, move the differential 3. Drive cautiously and do not exceed 25 mph (40
lock switch to LOCK to engage the differential km/h). When the differential is fully locked, the
lock. turning radius will increase because the vehicle
understeers. See Fig. 16.2.
16.1
A
Interaxle Lock Switch
The interaxle lock switch allows the driver to lock the
drive axles together. See Fig. 16.1, Item 1.
Interaxle Lock Operation

B
NOTICE
The interaxle lock should not be engaged on a
02/09/96 f350079a
vehicle with obviously spinning wheels. Engage-
ment at high speed or power can damage the
A. Turning Radius When the Differential Lock is axle(s).
Engaged (understeer condition)
B. Turning Radius When the Differential Lock is 1. With the engine running, move the interaxle lock
Disengaged switch to LOCK to engage the interaxle lock.
Fig. 16.2, Turning Radii 2. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the ac-
celerator until the interaxle lock engages.
4. Move the differential lock switch to UNLOCK to
disengage the differential lock after leaving poor
road conditions. NOTICE
NOTE: If the differential lock is engaged when Do not operate the vehicle continuously with the
the engine is shut down, the differential lock will interaxle locked during extended good road con-
disengage. ditions. To do so could result in damage to the
axle gearing and excessive driveline and tire
5. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the ac- wear.
celerator to allow the wheels to fully unlock, then
resume driving at normal speed. 3. Proceed over poor road conditions with caution.
4. Move the interaxle lock switch to UNLOCK to
Interaxle Lock disengage the interaxle lock after leaving poor
road conditions.
The interaxle lock (axle lock, interaxle differential
lockout) feature is available on vehicles wth tandem- 5. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the ac-
or tridem-drive axles. The interaxle lock causes the celerator to allow the interaxle lock to disengage,
drive axle shafts to rotate together, and is recom- then resume driving at normal speed. Once the
mended for use under adverse road conditions interaxle lock disengages, the indicator light will
where greater traction is needed. Do not wait until go off.
traction is lost and the tires are spinning before en-
gaging the interaxle lock.
See the axle manufacturers website for more infor-
mation.
When engaged, the interaxle lock essentially makes
the driveshaft a solid connection between the drive
axles. Power entering the forward drive axle is trans-
mitted straight through to the rearmost axle(s). Drive-
line torque is now delivered equally and the drive
axles, and wheels, turn together at the same speed.
The interaxle lock increases drivetrain and tire wear
and should be used only when improved traction is
required.
16.2
17
Fifth Wheels
Fifth Wheels, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4
Fifth Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5
Fifth Wheels
Fifth Wheels, General Fifth Wheel Lubrication

Information
WARNING
WARNING Keep the fifth wheel plate lubricated to prevent
binding between the tractor and trailer. A binding
Do not use any fifth wheel that fails to operate fifth wheel could cause erratic steering and loss
properly. Doing so may cause loss of vehicle of vehicle control, possibly resulting in personal
control, possibly resulting in severe personal in- injury or death.
jury or death.
The standard fifth wheel plate must be kept well lu-
Air-Suspension Dump Valve bricated with chassis grease to prevent friction and
binding between the tractor fifth wheel plate and the
The air-suspension dump valve may be used to ad- trailer.
just the tractor height to aid with coupling to or un-
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, inspect the condition
coupling from a trailer. See Fig. 17.1. When the
of the low-lube pads. There should be no damaged
switch is set to LOWER, the air-suspension dump
or missing pieces. Slight puckering at the outside
valve deflates the air springs to lower the rear of the
edges is normal.
vehicle. In the AUTO position, the automatic ride-
control valves operate for normal driving. For lubrication instructions, see Group 31 of the Ar-
gosy Maintenance Manual.
WARNING
Fifth Wheel Coupling
driving. The suspension will not absorb road Fifth wheel coupling is activated with the release
shocks, possibly damaging components, and ve- handle located on either the right side or left side of
hicle handling may be compromised. This could the fifth wheel. Coupling has successfully occurred
result in loss of vehicle control, possibly result- when the kingpin has been forced into the jaws and
ing in severe personal injury or death. the release handle has moved to the locked position.
NOTICE NOTICE
Do not operate the vehicle over uneven ground Some fifth wheels may be mounted on sliding
such as ramps, speed bumps, curbs, etc. with rails. Before attempting to couple a trailer to a
the air springs deflated. Doing this may lead to sliding fifth wheel, the slide feature must be
air bag separation from the piston, preventing the locked to prevent the top plate from sliding rap-
suspension air springs from inflating. idly forward or rearward, causing damage to the
fifth wheel or kingpin.
Coupling, Fontaine or Holland Fifth

DO NOT LOWER
Wheel
WHEN VEHICLE SUSP 1. Chock the trailer tires.
IS IN MOTION AIR 2. Ensure the fifth wheel jaw is fully open and the
release handle is in the unlocked position.
LOWER AUTO 3. Make sure the fifth wheel top plate is tilted so the
ramps are as low as possible.
10/25/2010 f611101
Fig. 17.1, Air-Suspension Dump Valve
17.1
Fifth Wheels
4. Position the tractor so that the center of the fifth

wheel is in line with the trailer kingpin. The king-
pin should be in a position to enter the throat of
the locking mechanism. B
NOTICE
Attempting to couple at the wrong height may
cause improper coupling, which could result in
damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
A
5. Adjust the trailer height if required.
For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer 09/10/2010 f311125
should contact the fifth wheel approximately 4 to
8 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the fifth wheel A. Adjust trailer height B. Ramps tilted down
pivot. See Fig. 17.2. Fig. 17.3, Trailer Connection Point, Low-Lube Fifth
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel Wheel
must slide freely under the trailer, and the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel at the pivot. See WARNING
Fig. 17.3.
A visual inspection is required by law. Some im-
D proper couplings can pass a pull test. Sound is
not reliable. Get out of the cab and look. Incor-
C A
rect coupling could cause the trailer to discon-
nect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury
or death.
8. Perform a coupling inspection, checking that
there is no gap between the bottom of the trailer
B and the fifth wheel, and that the kingpin is se-
curely locked. See Fig. 17.4.
10/28/2010 f311124 When the kingpin is locked securely, the fifth
A. Fifth wheel must lift C. Ramps tilted down wheel release handle moves to the locked posi-
trailer D. 4 to 8 inches tion. Make sure that the safety latch is down over
B. Adjust trailer height the release handle to hold the release handle in
the locked position (the safety latch will only ro-
Fig. 17.2, Trailer Connection Point, Standard Fifth tate down if the control handle is fully retracted in
Wheel
the locked position).
6. With the fifth wheel lock opening aligned with the
trailer kingpin, back the tractor slowly toward the
trailer. After sliding under the trailer, STOP to
prevent from hitting the kingpin too hard, then
resume backing slowly until the fifth wheel locks.
On a standard fifth wheel, the fifth wheel must lift
the trailer. A B
09/10/2010 f311126
On a low-lube fifth wheel, do not lift the trailer as
this may damage the fifth wheel plate. A. No gap between trailer B. Kingpin inside lock
and fifth wheel
7. Apply the tractor parking brakes.
Fig. 17.4, Coupling Inspection
17.2
Fifth Wheels
9. Release the tractor parking brakes. Test for king-

pin lock slowly inching the tractor forward, pulling
on the trailer against the chocks.
A
10. After kingpin lock is completed, connect the
tractor-to-trailer air system lines and the electrical
cable to the trailer. Take care to prevent dirt or
foreign material from entering the air system
lines.
NOTICE
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps 09/10/2010 f311128
the trailer air hoses and electrical cables posi- A. Lock held open by catch mechanism
tioned so that they do not rub on anything. Rub-
bing may wear through hoses or cables, resulting Fig. 17.5, Jost Release Handle Unlocked
in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, poten-
tially affecting trailer brake or electrical systems.
NOTICE
11. Charge the air brake system with air, checking
that the air connections do not leak. Attempting to couple at the wrong height may
cause improper coupling, which could result in
WARNING damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
7. Adjust the trailer height (if required).
Incorrect fifth wheel lock adjustment could cause
the trailer to disconnect, possibly resulting in se- For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer
rious personal injury or death. should contact the fifth wheel approximately 4 to
8 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the pivot. See
12. With the trailer tires chocked and the brakes set, Fig. 17.2.
check for clearance between the kingpin and the
fifth wheel jaws by moving the tractor forward For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel
and backward against the locked kingpin. If slack must slide freely under the trailer, and the trailer
is present, uncouple the trailer and have the fifth should contact the fifth wheel at the pivot. See
wheel inspected and adjusted by a certified Fig. 17.3.
technician. 8. Back the tractor under the trailer.
Coupling, Jost Fifth Wheel On a standard fifth wheel, the fifth wheel must lift
the trailer.
1. Tilt the ramp down. On a low-lube fifth wheel, do not lift the trailer as
2. Open the kingpin locks. See Fig. 17.5. this may damage the fifth wheel plate.
3. Back the vehicle close to the trailer, centering the 9. After sliding under the trailer, STOP to prevent
kingpin on the fifth wheel. from hitting the kingpin too hard, then resume
backing slowly until the fifth wheel locks.
4. Chock the trailer tires.
5. Connect the air lines and electrical cable. WARNING
6. Ensure that the red trailer air supply valve (trailer
A visual inspection is required by law. Some im-
brake) is pulled out, and that the trailer parking proper couplings can pass a pull test. Sound is
brakes are set. See Chapter 5 in this manual for not reliable. Get out of the cab and look. Incor-
operation of the dash-mounted brake controls.
rect coupling could cause the trailer to discon-
nect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury
or death.
17.3
Fifth Wheels
10. Apply the tractor parking brake, then perform a 6.1 Fontaine: Lift the safety latch and pull the
physical check for positive kingpin lock, and that lock release handle to the unlocked posi-
there is no gap between the trailer and the fifth tion.
wheel. See Fig. 17.4.
6.2 Holland: In the locked position the safety
11. Ensure that the release handle is in the locked indicator swings freely over the release
position adjacent to the casting. See Fig. 17.6. handle.
Pull the release handle out. When the
upper release handle shoulder is outside
the slot, raise the handle and place the
shoulder of the upper rod against the plate
casting, above the slot.
The fifth wheel is now in the lock position
and is ready for uncoupling. As the tractor
pulls away from the trailer the kingpin
forces the jaw to rotate, contacting the
lock. Continued rotation of the jaw forces
the lock to move outward, and drops the
upper rod back into the slot. The wheel is
now ready for coupling.
6.3 Jost: Pull the retractable release handle
out, then secure it in the open position
with the catch. See Fig. 17.5.
05/29/2012 f311127a 7. Release the tractor parking brake then drive out
slowly, allowing the trailer to slide down the fifth
Fig. 17.6, Jost Release Handle Locked wheel and pick-up ramps.
12. Release the tractor parking brakes and test for Air-Actuated Uncoupling
kingpin lock by slowly moving the tractor forward,
pulling on the trailer against the chocks. An air-actuated kingpin release valve is optional with
any fifth wheel. See Fig. 17.7.
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling
Manual Uncoupling
1. Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes.
3. Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is
removed from the fifth wheel.
4. Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air system lines
and electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent
dirt or foreign material from entering the lines.
5. Verify that both the yellow parking-brake and red
trailer-air-supply knobs are out, the tractor and 10/26/2010 f611102
trailer parking brakes are set, and that the trailer
is prepared for uncoupling. Fig. 17.7, Air-Actuated Kingpin Release Valve
6. Release the kingpin locking mechanism following
the instructions for each manufacturer below.
17.4
Fifth Wheels
NOTE: In the event of an air system failure, air- trailer parking brakes are set, and that the trailer
actuated kingpins can be manually released fol- is prepared for uncoupling.
lowing the instructions for manual unlocking. NOTE: With a Jost fifth wheel, if the trailer park-
ing brake is not set the air-actuated valve will
WARNING not activate.
Once the kingpin release valve has been pulled 2. Release the tractor parking brake.
the kingpin lock is released. The vehicle MUST 3. Pull and hold the kingpin release valve until the
NOT be driven with the trailer until the trailer has kingpin lock mechanism opens and locks in
been uncoupled and coupled again. Failure to do place.
so may result in separation of the trailer from the
tractor, possibly causing serious personal injury 4. After the trailer has slid down the fifth wheel and
or death. pick-up ramps, release the kingpin release valve.
Preparing the Trailer for Uncoupling Fifth Wheel Slide

Before using the air valve to unlock a fifth wheel
kingpin, prepare the trailer as follows. WARNING
1. Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes.
Adjust the fifth wheel slide correctly, and do not
2. Chock the trailer tires. overload any tractor axle by incorrectly loading
3. Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is the trailer. Incorrect slide adjustment or improper
removed from the fifth wheel. axle loading could cause erratic steering and
loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in seri-
4. Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air lines and elec- ous personal injury or death.
trical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent dirt or
foreign material from entering the lines. On sliding fifth wheel assemblies, the fifth-wheel
plate is attached to rails that allow forward and rear-
Air-Activated Kingpin Unlock, Fontaine ward movement of the fifth wheel to optimally distrib-
ute the load across the axles. Slots are evenly
or Holland Fifth Wheel spaced along the slide rails, and retractable wedges
1. Verify that both the yellow parking-brake and red are positioned through the slots to hold the fifth
trailer-air supply knobs are out, the tractor and wheel in the desired position.
trailer parking brakes are set, and that the trailer The amount of load distribution on the front steering
is prepared for uncoupling. axle and rear drive axle(s) will have a direct effect on
NOTE: With a Fontaine or Holland fifth wheel, if the steering control of the vehicle. Determine the
the tractor parking brake is not set, the air- front and rear axle weights by weighing the vehicle
actuated kingpin-release valve will not activate. on scales designed for this purpose.
2. Pull and hold the kingpin release valve The maximum axle weight ratings are shown on the
(Fig. 17.7) until the kingpin lock mechanism Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
opens and locks in place. label or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(CMVSS) label attached to the left rear door post of
3. Release the kingpin release valve. the tractor. The desired load on the axle is no less
than 80 percent of the maximum axle weight rating,
4. Release the tractor parking brake.
but in no instances should the axle load exceed the
5. Drive out from under the trailer. maximum axle weight rating given on the FMVSS or
CMVSS label.
Air-Activated Kingpin Unlock, Jost Fifth
Wheel
1. Verify that both the yellow parking-brake and red
trailer-air-supply knobs are out, the tractor and
17.5
Fifth Wheels
Air Slide Operation

The slide feature may be operated with an air switch
mounted in the dash, that operates an air cylinder
that locks and unlocks the slide. See Fig. 17.8.
MUST BE 1
LOCKED WHEN FIFTH
VEHICLE IS IN WHL
MOTION SLIDE
A
UNLOCK LOCK
10/22/2009 f611074
1. Fifth Wheel Air-Slide Switch

Fig. 17.8, Air-Slide Switch
1. Set the air-slide switch (Fig. 17.8) to UNLOCK.

B
Ensure the locking plungers have released. See
Fig. 17.9. 09/10/2010 f311131
For a Jost fifth wheel, the mechanism activates A. Unlocked B. Locked
as shown in Fig. 17.10.
Fig. 17.10, Sliding Fifth Wheel, Jost
1
2. Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to re-
move the weight from the tractor.
3. Pull the red trailer-air-supply knob to set the
trailer-parking brakes.
4. Slowly move the tractor forward or backward
until the fifth wheel is in the desired location.
NOTICE
Ensure the trailer landing gear does not come in
contact with the tractor frame or other compo-
nents, and that the front of the trailer will not
come in contact with the rear of the cab or other
components if they extend beyond the rear of the
2
cab.
07/25/95 f310189 5. Apply the tractor parking brakes.
1. Locking Wedge 2. Air Cylinder
Fig. 17.9, Air-Operated Sliding Fifth Wheel (Fontaine WARNING
shown)
Check that the locking wedges have seated in the
slots. Failure to achieve complete lockup may
17.6
Fifth Wheels
allow disengagement of the tractor from the

trailer, possibly resulting in serious personal in-
jury or death.
6. Set the air-slide switch to LOCK. Visually inspect
the locking wedges or plungers to make sure
that they are fully inserted in the slide rail slots.
Verify that the plungers have engaged by tugging
the tractor forward while the trailer brakes are
locked and the tires are chocked.
NOTE: The fifth wheel may need to be moved
slightly to enable the locking wedges to fully
lock.
17.7
18
Trailer Couplings
Air-Suspension Dump Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Holland Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Premier Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2
Trailer Couplings
Air-Suspension Dump Valve

NOTICE
1
driving. When the air is exhausted, the suspen-
sion will not absorb road shocks, and compo-
nents may be damaged.
The air-suspension dump valve may be used to aid 2
in connecting or disconnecting from a trailer. When
the valve switch is set to LOWER, the air-suspension
dump valve deflates the air springs to lower the rear
of the vehicle. See Fig. 18.1. In the AUTO position,
the automatic ride-control valves operate for normal
driving. 3
NOTICE
Do not operate the vehicle over uneven ground
such as ramps, speed bumps, curbs, etc. with
the air springs deflated. Doing this may lead to 4
air bag separation from the piston, preventing the
suspension air springs from reinflating.
Holland Trailer Couplings

General Information 01/05/2012 f611158
IMPORTANT: Refer to the Holland web site 1. Interaxle Lock Switch
(www.hollandhitch.com) for additional informa- 2. Fifth Wheel Slide Switch
tion. 3. Rearmost Axle Differential Lock Switch
4. Air-Suspension Dump Switch
The Holland trailer coupling (Fig. 18.2) is designed
for use with trailers having a maximum gross weight Fig. 18.1, Axle and Suspension Switches
of 49,000 lbs (22 226 kg). It is a swivel-mount pintle
hook designed for heavy-duty construction, utility, 5. Close the latch, then insert the cotter pin.
and off-road applications. It is fastened to the rear
closing crossmember of the vehicle and is a non-air- NOTICE
adjusted coupling.
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps
Trailer Hookup the trailer air hoses and electrical cables posi-
tioned so that they do not rub on anything. Rub-
1. Chock the trailer tires. bing may wear through hoses or cables, resulting
2. Remove the cotter pin, then lift the lock and raise in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, poten-
the latch. tially affecting trailer brake or electrical systems.
3. Back the vehicle up until the drawbar eye is over 6. Connect the trailer electrical and air lines.
the horn of the pintle hook.
Trailer Release
4. Lower the trailer until the drawbar eye rests on
the pintle hook. 1. Apply the truck and trailer parking brakes.
18.1
Trailer Couplings
1 The Premier 2200 and 2400 trailer couplings are air

adjusted couplings with a rigid pintle hook, attached
2 to the rear closing crossmember. An air chamber,
mounted forward of the coupling, operates a push
rod, which pushes against a shoe inside the cou-
3 pling. The shoe maintains constant pressure on the
eye of the trailer drawbar when its over the pintle
hook. This takes up any slack in the trailer connec-
tion, providing smoother towing and less wear on the
pintle hook. The air pressure is activated when the
4 trailer brakes are released.
Trailer Hookup
12/08/2010 f311139
1. Lock 3. Latch
2. Cotter Pin 4. Pintle Hook 2. Push the latch lock towards the mounting plate
Fig. 18.2, Holland Trailer Coupling as far as possible then, while holding the latch
lock in place against the mounting plate, pull the
top of the latch as far as possible toward the
WARNING pintle hook.
Do not use the trailer air supply for parking trail- 3. While holding the latch in place, release the latch
ers not equipped with spring parking brakes. lock.
This applies the trailer service brakes only. As air 4. Back the vehicle up until the drawbar eye is over
bleeds from the trailer brake system, brake appli- the pintle hook, then lower the trailer.
cation is lost. This could allow the unattended
vehicle to roll away, possibly resulting in serious 5. Pull the top of the latch as far as possible toward
personal injury or death. the pintle hook then, while holding the latch in
position, push the latch lock towards the mount-
2. Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer. ing plate.
3. Disconnect the trailer air and electrical lines. 6. While holding the latch lock in place against the
Plug the air lines to keep them free of dirt. mounting plate, release the latch.
4. Take the weight of the trailer drawbar off the 7. Release the latch lock and make sure it is fully
pintle hook. seated in the slot on top of the latch.
5. Open the latch by first removing the cotter pin,
then lift up the lock and raise the latch. NOTICE
6. Slowly drive the vehicle away from the trailer. Always make sure the connection hanger keeps
the trailer air hoses and electrical cables posi-
Premier Trailer Couplings tioned so that they do not rub on anything. Rub-
bing may wear through hoses or cables, resulting
General Information in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, poten-
IMPORTANT: Before operating the Premier cou- tially affecting trailer brake or electrical systems.
pling, refer to the Premier web site at 8. Connect the trailers electrical and air lines.
www.premier-mfg.com for complete safety,
operation, and maintenance instructions. Trailer Release
Trailer couplings are attached to the rear closing 1. Apply the truck and trailer parking brakes.
crossmember. The Premier trailer couplings
(Fig. 18.3) are designed for use with trailers having a
maximum gross weight of 100,000 lbs (45 455 kg).
18.2
Trailer Couplings
1 1
3 3
A B
12/08/2010 f311138
A. Premiere 2400 Trailer Coupling B. Premiere 2200 Trailer Coupling
1. Latch Lock 3. Pintle Hook
2. Latch
Fig. 18.3, Premiere 2200 and 2400 Trailer Couplings
WARNING
Do not use the trailer air supply for parking trail-
ers not equipped with spring parking brakes.
This applies the trailer service brakes only. As air
bleeds from the trailer brake system, brake appli-
cation is lost. This could allow the unattended
vehicle to roll away, possibly resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
2. Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer.
3. Disconnect the trailer air and electrical lines.
Plug the air lines to keep them free of dirt.
4. Take the weight of the trailer drawbar eye off the
pintle hook.
5. Push the latch lock towards the mounting plate
as far as possible then, while holding the latch
lock in this position, pull the top of the latch as
far as possible toward the pintle hook.
6. While holding the latch in place, release the latch
lock.
7. Slowly drive the vehicle away from the trailer.
18.3
19
Headlight Aiming
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Checking Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Adjusting Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Headlight Aiming
Preliminary Checks 3. On the screen or wall, mark the locations of each

headlight bulb center using the distances found
Before checking or adjusting the headlight aim, com- in step 2. See Fig. 19.2, Items 2 and 3.
plete the following inspection: 4. Turn on the low-beam headlights.
Remove any large amounts of mud or ice from
5. Check the vertical adjustment of the low beams.
the underside of the fenders. The center of each beam projection should fall
Check the springs for sagging or broken on or near the marks made during step 3. See
leaves. Fig. 19.3.
Check the suspension for proper functioning of 6. Use Table 19.1 to determine the maximum verti-
the leveling mechanism. If the vehicle is cal distance allowable between the marks on the
equipped with an air suspension, make sure wall and the center of each low-beam projection.
that the height is properly adjusted. If the distance between either projection center
With the vehicle unloaded, check that the tires and the mark made on the wall or screen is
are inflated to the recommended air pressure. greater than the maximum distance given in
Table 19.1, adjust the vertical positioning of that
Clean the headlight lenses. Use a soft cloth headlight.
with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent, and
water.
Adjusting Headlight Aim
Checking Headlight Aim NOTE: Freightliner vehicles are offered with
various headlight assembly options. Because of
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, 25 ft (7.6 m) the various options, the location of adjustment
away from, and perpendicular to, a vertical screws on your vehicles headlight assembly
screen or wall. Shut down the engine and set the
may vary from what is shown here.
parking brake. Chock the tires.
2. Each headlight has a height adjusting dot. See The adjusting screw is located on the upper outboard
Fig. 19.1. Measure the distance from the ground corner of the headlight assembly. See Fig. 19.4. Turn
to the height adjusting dot on each headlight the adjusting screw clockwise to raise the beam and
(Fig. 19.2, Item A). Note those distances. counterclockwise to lower it, until the beam pattern
meets the acceptable standard.
05/16/2012 f545901
Measure beam height from the ground to the small dot
roughly in the center of the headlight lens.
Fig. 19.1, Headlight Beam Height Adjusting Dot
19.1
Headlight Aiming
2
3
A A
B
B
7.6 m)
25 ft (
1
05/16/2012 f545850d
A. Measure the distance from the ground to the center of each headlight bulb.
B. Mark where the center of each headlight projection should appear.
1. Screen or Wall 3. Center of Left-Hand Headlight Projection
2. Center of Right-Hand Headlight Projection
Fig. 19.2, Headlight Aiming Screen/Wall
1
2
05/16/2012 f545851d
A. Park the vehicle on a level surface 25 ft (7.6 m) away from a vertical screen or wall
1. Low-Beam Angle Upper Limit 3. Low-Beam Angle Lower Limit
2. Ideal Low-Beam Projection
Fig. 19.3, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits
19.2
Headlight Aiming
05/22/2012 f545903
1. Headlight Adjusting Screw
Fig. 19.4, Headlight Adjusting
Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits

Distance Between Ground Desired Variation (Fig. 19.3, Upper Limit (Fig. 19.3, Item Lower Limit (Fig. 19.3, Item
and Headlight: in (mm) Item 2): in (mm) 1): in (mm) up 3): in (mm) down
2236 (560900) 0 3.9 (100) 3.9 (100)
3648 (9001200) 2 (50) down 2 (50) 6 (150)
4854 (12001400) 2.5 (64) down 1.6 (40) 6.5 (165)
Table 19.1, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits
19.3
20
Cab Appearance
Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Dashboard Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
Cab Appearance
Care of Fiberglass Parts Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning

Wash unpainted fiberglass air fairings and shields To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brush-
monthly with a mild detergent, such as dishwashing ing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Harsh
liquid. Avoid strong alkaline cleansers. cleaning agents can cause permanent damage to
vinyl upholstery. To preserve the upholstery and pre-
Apply a wax specifically designed for fiberglass. vent damage, carefully review the following sections
for recommended cleaning procedures. Waxing or
Care of Chrome Parts refinishing improves soil resistance and cleanability
for all vinyls. Any hard wax, such as that used on
To prevent rust, keep chrome parts clean and pro- automobiles, may be used.
tected at all times. This is especially important during
winter driving and in coastal areas where there is Ordinary Dirt
exposure to salt air.
Wash the upholstery with warm water and mild soap,
When cleaning chrome parts, use clean water and a
such as saddle or oil soap. Apply soapy water to a
soft cloth or sponge. A mild detergent may also be
large area and allow to soak for a few minutes, then
used.
rub briskly with a cloth to remove the dirt. This can
Sponge gently, then rinse. If necessary, use a non- be repeated several times, as necessary.
abrasive chrome cleaner to remove stubborn rust or If dirt is deeply imbedded, use a soft bristle brush
other material. Do not use steel wool. after applying the soap.
To help protect the chrome after cleaning, apply a If dirt is extremely difficult to remove, wall-washing
coat of polishing wax to the surface. Never use wax preparations normally found around the home can be
on parts that are exposed to high heat, such as ex- used. Powdered cleaners, such as those used for
haust pipes. sinks and tiles, are abrasive and must be used with
caution as they can scratch the vinyl or give it a per-
Dashboard Care manent dull appearance.
NOTICE Chewing Gum

Harden the gum with an ice cube wrapped in a plas-
When cleaning the dashboard, instrument panel, tic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Any re-
or gauge lens covers, do not use Armor-All Pro- maining traces of gum can be removed with an all-
tectant, STP Son-of-a-Gun, window cleaner, or purpose light oil (peanut butter will also work) and
other equivalent treatments. These cleaners con- wiped off.
tain vinyl plasticizers which can cause stress
crazing in the interior plastic panels and can re- Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote
sult in cracking of the panels. Some cleaners can
also have an adverse effect on the clear plastic Each of these items stains vinyl after prolonged con-
of instrument panels and gauge lens covers, re- tact. They should be wiped off immediately and the
sulting in a foggy or cloudy appearance. This area carefully cleaned, using a cloth dampened with
type of damage is not covered by vehicle war- naphtha.
ranty.
To clean the dashboard, instrument panel, and gauge
Paint, Shoe Heel Marks
lens covers, use a cloth dampened with warm soapy Paint should be removed immediately. Do not use
water. Make certain to wring the cloth out well before paint remover or liquid-type brush cleaner on vinyl.
cleaning, as excess water will damage the electrical An unprinted cloth, dampened with naphtha or tur-
components. pentine may be used. Use care to prevent contact
with parts of the upholstery that are not vinyl.
20.1
Cab Appearance
Sulfide Stains Avoid any product that contains carbon tetrachloride

or other toxic materials. With either method, pretest a
Sulfide compounds, such as those found in eggs and small area before proceeding. Use a professional
some canned goods, can stain after prolonged con- upholstery cleaning service when extensive cleaning
tact with vinyl. These stains can be removed by plac- is needed.
ing a clean, unprinted piece of cloth over the spotted
area and pouring a liberal amount of 6 percent hy- Grease and Oil-Based Stains
drogen peroxide onto the cloth. Allow the saturated
cloth to remain on the spot for 30 to 60 minutes. For Dampen a small absorbent cloth with dry-cleaning
stubborn spots, allow the hydrogen-peroxide satu- solvent or spot remover. Apply the cloth carefully to
rated cloth to remain on the area overnight. Use cau- the spot from the outer edge to the center. Pat and
tion to prevent the solution from seeping into the blot the spot with a clean, dry cloth. Repeat several
seams, or it will weaken the cotton thread. times, as necessary, turning the cloths so that the
stain does not redeposit on the fabric.
Nail Polish and Nail Polish Remover
Sugar and Water-Based Stains
Prolonged contact with these substances causes per-
manent damage to vinyl. Careful blotting immediately Apply water-based detergent or cleaner, working in
after contact minimizes damage. Do not spread the circular motions. Pat and blot as dry as possible. Re-
liquid during removal. peat, if necessary, before drying thoroughly.
Shoe Polish Chewing Gum or Wax

Most shoe polishes contain dyes which penetrate Harden the gum or wax with an ice cube wrapped in
vinyl and stain it permanently. Shoe polish should be a plastic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Ex-
wiped off as quickly as possible using naphtha or cess wax can be absorbed by placing a thick white
lighter fluid. If staining occurs, try the procedure used blotter over the wax and heating with a warm (not
for sulfide stains. hot) iron. Remove the remainder by using the proce-
dure for grease and oil-based stains.
Ball Point Ink
Mildew
Ball point ink can sometimes be removed if rubbed
immediately with a damp cloth, using water or rub- Brush the dry fabric with a soft brush. Sponge with
bing alcohol. If this does not work, try the procedure detergent, and blot. If the fabric is colorfast, dilute a
used for sulfide stains. teaspoon of bleach in one quart (one liter) of cool
water. Apply with a swab, directly on the mildew
Miscellaneous stain. Dab repeatedly with clear, cool water, and blot
dry.
If stains do not respond to any of the treatments de-
scribed above, it is sometimes helpful to expose the Care of Exterior Lights
vinyl to direct sunlight for up to 30 hours. Mustard,
ball point ink, certain shoe polishes, and dyes often Clean the headlight lenses by hand only, using a
bleach out in direct sunlight, leaving the vinyl undam- flannel cloth with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent,
aged. and water.
Velour Upholstery Cleaning NOTICE

To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brush- Do not use a power buffer, paper towels, chemi-
ing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Spot cal solvents, or abrasive cleaners on the head-
clean with a mild solvent or an upholstery shampoo, light lens. These materials can remove the UV
or the foam from a mild detergent. When using a sol- coating from the surface, resulting in yellowing
vent or a dry-cleaning product, follow the instructions of the lens.
carefully, and clean only in a well-ventilated area.
20.2
21
In an Emergency
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Emergency Kit, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Emergency Filter Replacement, DAVCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Emergency Starting With Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6
In an Emergency
Hazard Warning Lights Emergency Filter

The hazard warning light switch tab is located on the Replacement, DAVCO
turn signal control lever. See Fig. 21.1. To operate
If the filter cover on the DAVCO fuel/water separator
the hazard lights, pull the tab out. All of the turn sig-
is broken, it will not be possible to operate the ve-
nal lights and both of the indicator lights on the con-
hicle. A standard spin-on filter will correct this prob-
trol panel will flash.
lem.
Refer to the DAVCO web site for additional informa-
tion, www.davcotec.com.
WARNING
Fluid circulated through the fuel/water separator
to heat the fuel may be diesel fuel returned from
the engine, or engine coolant. Drain the fuel/
water separator only when the engine and fluids
have cooled. Draining it when the engine is hot
could cause severe personal injury due to scald-
9/26/95 f541098
ing.
If returning fuel is released into the atmosphere,
Fig. 21.1, Hazard Warning Light Switch Tab
its vapors can ignite in the presence of any igni-
To cancel the hazard warning lights, push the turn tion source. Do not expose the fuel to, or work
signal control lever either up or down, then return the with the fuel system near, open flame or intense
lever to its neutral position. heat. To do so could cause fire, possibly result-
ing in serious personal injury or property dam-
age.
Fire Extinguisher
1. Shut down the engine, apply the parking brake,
A fire extinguisher is located either in the cab by the and chock the tires.
drivers door, or in the baggage compartment.
2. Put a clean receptacle under the fuel/water sepa-
rator and attach a piece of hose to the drain
Emergency Kit, Optional valve, to direct fuel into the receptacle.
An optional emergency kit may be located in the cab. NOTE: The drain valve on the Fuel Pro 382 has
The package includes one or more of each of the a 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) opening; use a hose with
following: first aid kit, a reflective vest, and a triangu- a 1/2-inch pipe thread to fit correctly.
lar reflector and flare kit.
3. Remove the vent cap (Fig. 21.2, Item 14) and
If there is an emergency while driving, cautiously pull open the drain valve (Fig. 21.2, Item 1) to drain
off the road, paying attention to other traffic. Turn on the fuel to just below the collar level, then close
the hazard warning lights. Place the flares and reflec- the drain valve.
tor along the side of the road, to alert other drivers
that an emergency situation exists. 4. Using a DAVCO collar wrench (Fig. 21.3), re-
move the clear cover and collar.
WARNING NOTE: Broken vent cap and collar warranty
claims will not be accepted if any tool other than
Use extreme care when placing flares in emer- a DAVCO collar wrench, p/n 380134 or 382002,
gency situations that involve exposure to flam-
mable substances such as fuel. An explosion or
is used for removal. During installation, the vent
fire could occur causing serious personal injury. cap and collar are to be hand-tightened only,
not tightened with a wrench.
21.1
In an Emergency
VENT CAP
FOR REMOVAL OF TOP COLLAR ONLY
15
14
13
02/16/2009 f470277
12
Fig. 21.3, DAVCO Collar Wrench
5. Remove the filter and dispose of it in an environ-

mentally acceptable manner.
6. Clean all threads and sealing surfaces very thor-
11 oughly. Even a small amount of dirt will prevent
the fuel/water separator from sealing, and an air
leak will result.
7. Ensure that the drain valve is closed.
9
10
8. Remove the filter grommet from the filter stud, if
equipped.
9. Fill the housing to the top with clean diesel fuel.
8
6 10. Install a standard fuel filter element on the filter
7 stud. If a standard filter element is not available,
install a spin-on fuel filter element (part number
FF105 or equivalent).
11. Install the cover O-ring, clear cover, and the col-
lar. Hand-tighten the collar.
12. Install and hand-tighten the vent cap O-ring and
5 vent cap.
4 13. Start the engine. When the lubricating oil
reaches its normal operating pressure, increase
2 3
engine speed to high idle for one to two minutes
to purge air from the system.
1
Emergency Starting With
02/08/2011 f470567 Jumper Cables
1. Drain Valve 9. Fuel Outlet Port
2. Bottom Plate 10. Filter Element When using jumper cables, follow the instructions
3. Heat Exchanger 11. Spring below.
4. Bottom Plate O-Ring 12. Clear Cover
5.
6.
Lower Housing
Grommet
13.
14.
Vent Cap O-Ring
Vent Cap
WARNING
7. Cover O-Ring 15. Collar
8. Inlet Port/Check Valve
Batteries release explosive gas. Do not smoke
when working around batteries. Put out all flames
Fig. 21.2, DAVCO Fuel/Water Separator (Fuel Pro 382
shown)
21.2
In an Emergency
and remove all sources of sparks or intense heat clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
in the vicinity of the battery. Do not allow the ve- could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
hicles to touch each other. Do not lean over the severe personal injury from explosion or acid
batteries when making connections, and keep all burns.
other persons away from the batteries. Failure to
5. Connect the negative (-) jumper cable to the
follow these precautions could lead to severe
negative terminal or jump start post on the
personal injury as a result of an explosion or
booster battery.
acid burns.
6. Connect the other end of the negative jumper
NOTICE cable to the negative ground stud on the vehicle
requiring the jump start.
Make sure both electrical systems are the same 7. Start the engine of the vehicle providing the jump
voltage. Electronic devices on both vehicles can start and let the engine run a few minutes to
be damaged when connected to a vehicle with a charge the batteries of the other vehicle.
different operating voltage.
8. Attempt to start the engine of the vehicle receiv-
1. Apply the parking brakes and turn off all lights ing the jump. Do not operate the starter longer
and other electrical devices. Ensure that the ve- than 30 seconds, and wait at least two minutes
hicles are not touching and both ignition switches between starting attempts to allow the starter to
are turned to the OFF position. cool.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to jump start a 9. When the engine starts, let it idle a few minutes.
damaged battery.
10. Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the
2. Remove the battery box cover. negative cable stud on the jump started vehicle.
11. Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the
NOTICE booster battery.
Always connect the batteries and jumper cables 12. Disconnect the positive cable from the booster
correctly (positive-to-positive and negative-to- battery.
negative). Connecting a charging device back- 13. Disconnect the other end of the positive jumper
wards (positive-to-negative) can severely damage
cable from the jump started vehicle.
the vehicle electrical content and cause non-
warrantable failures. 14. Install the battery box cover; be sure it is posi-
tioned properly before fastening the latch.
IMPORTANT: On vehicles equipped with op-
tional jump start posts, connect to these posts
instead of the battery terminals. Jump start Towing
posts may be installed in various locations on When it is necessary to tow the vehicle, make sure
the vehicle. the instructions below are closely followed to prevent
3. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the damage to the vehicle.
positive battery terminal or jump start post. See
Fig. 21.4. WARNING
4. Connect the other end of the positive jumper Do not tow an unbraked vehicle if the combined
cable to the positive terminal or jump start post weight of both vehicles is more than the sum of
on the booster battery providing the charge. the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR) of the tow-
ing vehicle. Otherwise brake capacity will be in-
WARNING adequate, which could result in personal injury or
death.
Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
21.3
In an Emergency
4
D
B
3 E
2
+
+
+ +

C
+
+
1
01/07/2011 f545725
Disconnect jumper cables in the REVERSE order that they were connected.
A. Discharged Battery C. Positive Jumper Cable E. Booster Battery
B. Negative Ground Stud D. Negative Jumper Cable
1. 1st Connection: Positive Jumper Cable to Discharged Battery
2. 2nd Connection: Positive Jumper Cable to Booster Battery
3. 3rd Connection: Negative Jumper Cable to Booster Battery
4. 4th Connection: Negative Jumper Cable to Negative Ground Stud (discharged battery)
Fig. 21.4, Jumper Connections
Front Towing Hookup 2. Remove both drive axle shafts. On dual drive
axles, if the vehicle is to be lifted and towed, re-
1. Disconnect the battery ground cables. move only the rearmost drive axle shafts.
On vehicles equipped with an air fairing, remove
NOTICE both the forward and rearmost drive axle shafts if
there is insufficient towing clearance.
Failure to remove the axle shafts when towing
the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground 3. Cover the ends of the hubs with metal plates or
could result in damage to the transmission and plywood cut to fit the axle opening, and drilled to
other components. fit the axle shaft studs. This prevents lubricant
21.4
In an Emergency
from leaking out, and will keep contaminants 14 inches (36 cm). If necessary, lower the ve-
from getting into and damaging the wheel bear- hicle.
ings and axle lubricant.
11. Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and sig-
nal lights. Connect any special towing lights re-
NOTICE quired by local regulations.
Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains
could cause damage, leading to eventual frame WARNING
failure.
Failure to chock the tires or connect the tow
4. On dual drive axles, if the vehicle is to be lifted trucks air brake system before releasing the
and towed, chain the forward rear-axle assembly spring parking brakes could allow the disabled
to the vehicle frame; use protection to keep the vehicle to suddenly roll. This could cause prop-
chains from damaging the frame. erty damage or personal injury.
5. Remove the bumper extension and chrome bum- 12. Chock the disabled vehicles tires, and connect
per, if so equipped. Remove the bumper fairing, the towing vehicles air brake system to the ve-
if so equipped. hicle being towed. Then, release the spring park-
ing brakes and remove the chocks.
6. On vehicles equipped with an air fairing, adjust
the trim tab to the lowest position.
Rear Towing Hookup
NOTICE NOTICE
Do not pass a sling (for example, a rope or chain)
from one tow hook to another to fasten for tow- Using a rear towing hookup on a vehicle
ing. Known as reeving, this practice is not per- equipped with a roof fairing could cause damage
missible in most industrial applications of towing to the cab structure.
and hoisting. Reeving can overload the hooks If reverse towing at speeds above 45 mph (70
and result in damage to the vehicle. kph) is necessary, hold down the cab with ten-
7. Attach the towing device. Due to the many vari- sion straps looped over the cab shocks and
ables that exist in towing, positioning the lifting under the frame rails. Failure to do so could
and towing device is the sole responsibility of the allow the wind load to lift the cab unexpectedly,
towing-vehicle operator. resulting in damage to the air springs and other
components.
8. On vehicles equipped with an air fairing, mea-
sure the distance from the ground to the bumper, 1. If the vehicle is equipped with cab air suspen-
or from the ground to a frame bracket. sion, and reverse towing at speeds above 45
mph (70 kph) is necessary, hold down the cab as
9. Lift the vehicle, and secure the safety chains. If follows:
extra towing clearance is needed, remove the
front wheels. 1.1 Drain the air from the cab air springs.
1.2 Loop a 2-inch (5-cm) ratchet-style tension
WARNING strap (rated 2000 lb [900 kg] minimum
work load) over the top of the cab shock
Failure to lower the vehicle could result in the air and under the frame rail. Tighten the strap
fairing striking an overhead obstruction, such as for a snug fit. If the cab is equipped with
a bridge or overpass, and causing vehicle dam- two or more shocks, restrain the aftmost
age or personal injury. shock on each side of the vehicle.
10. On vehicles equipped with an air fairing, repeat 2. Place the front tires straight forward and secure
the measurement taken in step 8. The difference the steering wheel in this position.
between the two measurements must not exceed 3. Disconnect the battery ground cables.
21.5
In an Emergency
NOTICE
Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains
could cause damage, leading to eventual frame
failure.
4. On dual drive axles, using protection to keep the
chains from damaging the vehicle frame, chain
the forward-rear drive axle to the frame.
5. Attach the towing device.
NOTE: Due to the many variables that exist in
towing, positioning the lifting and towing device
is the sole responsibility of the towing-vehicle
operator.
6. Lift the vehicle and secure the safety chains. If
extra clearance is needed, remove the bumper
extension if equipped.
7. Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and sig-
nal lights. Also connect any special towing lights
required by local regulations.
Fire in the Cab

The incidence of fire in heavy- and medium-duty
trucks is rare. Federal regulations limit the flammabil-
ity of specified materials used inside the cab, but de-
spite this, most materials will burn. The cab of this
vehicle contains urethane foam, which is of concern
in this respect.
WARNING
Urethane foam is flammable! Do not allow any
flames, sparks, or other heat sources such as
cigarettes or light bulbs to contact urethane
foam. Urethane foam in contact with such heat
sources could cause a serious, rapid fire, which
could result in death, severe burns, or gas poi-
soning, as well as damage to the vehicle.
In Case of a Cab Fire

As quickly as possible, bring the vehicle to a safe
stop, apply the parking brake, turn off the ignition,
and get out of the vehicle.
21.6
22
Pre- and Post-Trip
Checklists
Periodic Inspections and Maintenance, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Fluids Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists
Periodic Inspections and Saddle Tank Areas Comp.

Drain air reservoirs (without automatic drain
Maintenance, General 1
valves)
Information 2 Fuel tank(s) secure
3 Frame rails and crossmembers
It is the drivers responsibility to perform an inspec- 4 Visible exhaust components
tion, and ensure the complete road-worthiness of a
5 Air intake system
vehicle, before placing it into service. Commercial
vehicles may be subject to inspection by authorized
Forward Engine Compartment Comp.
inspectors, and an unsafe vehicle can be taken out
1 Leakage under engine
of service until the driver or owner repairs it.
2 Engine oil level
Use the following checklists to ensure that vehicle 3 Engine coolant level
components are in good working condition before 4 Windshield washer reservoir level
each trip. Careful inspections eliminate stops later to
fix overlooked or forgotten items. Cab Comp.
The checklists in this chapter can be copied and kept Reset dash-mounted air intake restriction
1
as a record that the procedures have been com- indicator
pleted. For details on how to inspect each item on 2 Air-pressure warning systems
the checklists, see the corresponding procedure 3 Air governor cut-in and cut-out pressures
(step number) in Chapter 23. 4 Air pressure build-up time
5 Air system leakage
Checklists 6 Air pressure reserve
7 Mirrors, windows, windshield
NOTE: Checklists in this chapter correspond 8 Horn, windshield wipers, windshield washers
with the procedures and steps in Chapter 23, 9 Heater and defroster
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Mainte- 10 Interior lights
nance. Your vehicle may not be equipped with 11 Exterior lights
all components listed below. 12 Seat belts and tether belts
13 Fuel level
Daily Pretrip Inspection Checklists 14 Mirror adjustment
See the following tables for a list of procedures that 15 Service brakes
should be performed daily, before the first trip. Place 16 Backup alarm
a check mark in the complete (Comp.) column to
indicate a procedure has been performed.
Inspector Date
Suspension and Slack Adjusters Comp.

1 Suspension components
2 Slack adjusters
Wheels and Tires Comp.

1 Tire condition
2 Tire inflation
3 Rims and wheel components
4 Wheel bearing oil seals and lubrication levels
5 Mud Flaps
22.1
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists
Weekly Post-trip Inspection Checklist Fluids Added

See the following table for procedures that should be Use the following table to note any fluids that were
performed weekly, post-trip. Place a check mark in added during the inspection and maintenance proce-
the complete (Comp.) column to indicate a procedures.
dure has been performed.
Fluids Added During Inspection
Inspector Date Fluid Amount Added
Wheel Bearing Lubricant
Engine Oil
Air Intake System Comp. Power Steering Fluid
1 Air intake restriction indicator Engine Coolant
2 Reset air restriction indicator if necessary Windshield Washer Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (DOT
Engine Compartment Comp. 4 brake fluid)
1 Fuel/water separator
2 Steering components
3 Serpentine belts
4 Power steering fluid level
5 Visible engine wiring
Monthly Post-trip Inspection

Checklists
See the following tables for procedures that should
be performed monthly, post-trip. Place a check mark
in the complete (Comp.) column to indicate a proce-
dure has been performed.
Inspector Date
Brake Components Comp.

1 Brake system components
2 Brake chambers
3 Air brake lines
4 Flex air hoses
5 Brake linings and brake drums
6 Brake lining thickness
Saddle Tank Areas Comp.

Drain air reservoirs (with automatic drain
1
valves)
2 Batteries
Engine Compartment Comp.

1 Hydraulic clutch reservoir
2 Radiator and heater hoses
22.2
23
Pre- and Post-Trip
Inspections and
Maintenance
Daily Pretrip Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Weekly Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.7
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.9
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
Daily Pretrip Inspection and

Maintenance 4
5
Complete the following inspection and maintenance
6
procedures to ensure that vehicle components are in
good working condition before each trip. A driver who 7
3
is familiar with the vehicle and drives it regularly can 8
perform the daily inspections, then add the weekly
and monthly post-trip inspections as scheduled. 2 9
If the driver does not operate the vehicle on a con-
sistent basis, all daily, weekly, and monthly inspec- 1
tion and maintenance procedures should be per-
formed before the trip. 10
IMPORTANT: The pre- and post-trip checklists,

inspections, and maintenance procedures de- 06/17/2003 f421398
tailed in this chapter are not all-inclusive. 1. 7/16-inch Adjusting 6. Clevis
Refer to other component and body manufactur- Nut 7. -inch Clevis Pin
ers instructions for specific inspection and 2. Grease Fitting 8. 1/4-inch Clevis Pin
maintenance instructions, as well as local, state, 3. Boot 9. Grease Relief
and federal guidelines. 4. Link Opening
5. Brake Chamber Piston 10. Slack Adjuster Spline
NOTE: If any system or component does not Rod
pass this inspection, it must be corrected before Fig. 23.1, Gunite Automatic Slack Adjuster
operating the vehicle. Whenever equipment re-
quires adjustment, replacement, and/or repair,
see the Century Class Trucks Workshop Manual
for procedures and specifications. 1
2
Suspension and Slack Adjuster
Inspection 3
Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect suspen-

sion and slack adjuster components.
1. Inspect the following suspension components for
signs of structural damage, cracks, or wear. 4 8 9
springs 7
spring hangers 6
shocks
suspension arms 5
10/11/2005 A f421397
suspension brackets 1. Clevis 6. Control-Arm Washers
axle seats 2. Slack Adjuster and Nut
3. Clevis Pin 7. Anchor Strap Slot
bushings 4. Manual Adjusting Nut 8. Anchor Strap
5. Control Arm 9. Brake Chamber
2. Inspect slack adjusters for signs of damage. See
Fig. 23.1, Fig. 23.2, or Fig. 23.3. Fig. 23.2, Haldex Automatic Slack Adjuster
23.1
1. Inspect each tire for the following:

valve stem caps on every tire, screwed on
finger-tight
3 bulges, cracks, cuts, and penetrations
4
oil contamination (petroleum derivatives will
5
soften the rubber and destroy the tire)
6 tread depthif tread is less than 4/32 inch
(3 mm) on any front tire, or less than 2/32
7 inch (1.5 mm) on any rear tire, replace the
8 tire
debris lodged between duel tire sets
2. Check tire inflation.
2 For inflation pressures and maximum loads, see
the tire manufacturers guidelines. Inflate the tires
to the applicable pressures if needed.
If a tire has been run flat or under-inflated, check
the wheel and tire for damage before adding air.
Keep compressed air reservoirs and lines dry
during tire inflation. Use well-maintained inline
moisture traps and service them regularly.
9
1 10
01/31/2011 f422530
WARNING
1. Grease Fitting (if 5. Clevis Pin (large)
equipped) 6. Clevis Pin (small) Do not operate the vehicle with underinflated or
2. Slack Adjuster 7. Actuator Rod overinflated tires. Incorrect inflation can stress
Housing 8. Boot the tires and make the tires and rims more sus-
3. Brake Chamber 9. Manual Adjusting Nut
Pushrod 10. Camshaft Splines
ceptible to damage, possibly leading to rim or
4. Clevis tire failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
Fig. 23.3, Meritor Automatic Slack Adjuster
Inspect slack adjuster boots, if equipped, NOTICE

for cuts or tears.
A weekly pressure loss of 4 psi (28 kPa) or more
Inspect anchor straps, if equipped, for in a tire may indicate damage. The tire should be
damage. inspected and, if necessary, repaired or replaced
by a qualified tire service facility.
Look for worn clevis pins on brake cham-
ber pushrods. IMPORTANT: The load and cold inflation pres-
Look for missing or damaged cotter pins sure must not exceed the rim or wheel manu-
on the clevis pins. facturers recommendations, even though the
tire may be approved for a higher load inflation.
Ensure chamber piston rods are in line Consult the rim or wheel manufacturer for the
with the slack adjusters. correct tire inflation pressure for the vehicle
load.
Wheel and Tire Inspection
3. Examine each rim and wheel component.
Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect each
wheel and tire assembly.
23.2
3.1 Remove all dirt and debris from the as-

sembly. Rust streaks or metal build-up 1
around stud holes, or out-of-round or worn 10 8
stud holes, may be caused by loose wheel
nuts.
3 6
WARNING
Have any worn or damaged wheel components
replaced by a qualified person using the wheel
manufacturers instructions and the wheel indus- 5 4
trys standard safety precautions and equipment.
Otherwise a vehicle or workshop accident could
occur, possibly resulting in serious personal in-
7 9
jury or death.
2
3.2 Inspect for broken, cracked, badly worn, 04/30/2007 f400268
bent, rusty, or sprung rings and rims.
Fig. 23.4, Tightening Pattern, 10-Hole Wheels
NOTICE
Use the recommended torque values and follow 1 2
the proper tightening sequence. Insufficient
wheel nut torque can cause wheel shimmy, re-
sulting in wheel damage, stud breakage, and ex- 7 4
treme tire tread wear. Excessive wheel nut torque
can break studs, damage threads, and crack
discs in the stud hole area.
3.3 Make sure all wheel nuts are tightened. If
tightening is necessary, use the tightening 5 6
pattern in Fig. 23.4 or Fig. 23.5 to initially
tighten the flange nuts to 50 to 100 lbfft
(68 to 136 Nm). Then tighten the flange
3 8
nuts to 450 to 500 lbfft (610 to 678 Nm). 03/08/2012 f400052a
4. Inspect the outboard side of all wheel hubs and
Fig. 23.5, Tightening Pattern, 8-Hole Wheels
the hub oil seal area on the inboard side of each
wheel for signs of oil leakage. If any oil is found
on wheel and tire or brake components, remove Saddle Tank Area Inspections
the vehicle from service until the leak has been
fixed. WARNING
If needed, fill the hubs to the level indicated on
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into
the hub cap. See Group 35 of the Century Class
the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or
Trucks Maintenance Manual for recommended
sludge particles may be in the airstream and
lubricants.
could cause injury.
5. Check that mud flaps are undamaged and hang
10 inches (25.4 cm) or less from the ground. NOTICE
If the water drained from the air reservoirs is
cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the
compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the
23.3
air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air 2. Check the engine oil level.
brake system, which could adversely affect brak-
ing. NOTICE
1. Drain the brake system air reservoirs (reservoirs
without automatic drain valves only). Operating the engine with the oil level below the
minimum fill (or "add") mark or above the maxi-
mum fill (or "full") mark could result in engine
WARNING damage.
Never operate the engine with the fuel tank shut- 2.1 Check the oil level with the vehicle parked
off valves partially closed. This could damage the on a level surface. See Fig. 23.6. See the
fuel pump, causing sudden loss of engine power, engine manufacturers guidelines for en-
possibly resulting in serious personal injury due gine shutdown time requirements prior to
to reduced vehicle control. checking the oil level.
2. Ensure fuel tanks are secured to their mounting
brackets and that the mounting brackets are se- 2
cured to the frame.
If equipped with fuel tank shutoff valves, be sure
the valves are fully open.
3. Inspect visible frame rails for missing bolts, shiny
areas, or rust streaks. Check all visible cross-
members for damage or signs of looseness.
4. Inspect visible components of the exhaust sys-
tem to ensure connections are tight.
Inspect upstream of the aftertreatment device
1
(ATD), if equipped, for cracking or signs of leaks,
such as soot trails. Inspect downstream of the
ATD for signs of exhaust leaks, such as blister-
ing or warping of nearby components.
05/18/98 f500310
NOTICE 1. Dipstick 2. Coolant Fill Cap
Failure to maintain a sealed air intake system Fig. 23.6, Oil Level Checking
could allow the entry of dirt and contaminants
into the engine. This could adversely affect en- IMPORTANT: On engines that are equipped
gine performance and result in engine damage. with an exhaust aftertreatment system
(ATS), use engine oil with less than 1% sul-
5. Inspect the air intake system for leaks or dam- fated ash.
age. Ensure the snorkel intake is free of debris, if
equipped. 2.2 If the oil level is at or below the minimum
fill (or "add") mark on the dipstick, add
Push the reset button on the air intake restriction
enough oil to maintain the level between
indicator located on the air cleaner, if equipped.
the minimum and maximum fill marks. See
the engine operation manual for recom-
Forward Engine Compartment mended lubricants.
Inspection
Open the grille. See Chapter 2 for instructions. NOTICE
1. Check the ground underneath the engine for fuel, Low coolant could result in engine overheating,
oil, or coolant leaks. which could cause engine damage.
23.4
IMPORTANT: The surge tank must be cool to 1

check the coolant level.
3. Check the engine coolant level in the radiator
surge tank. See Fig. 23.6.
NOTICE
Coolant must be filled to the full line of the surge
tank. Low coolant could result in engine over-
heating, which could cause engine damage.
3.1 If the coolant is low, fill the surge tank to
the full line with a 50/50 mixture of water
and the type of antifreeze currently in-
stalled in your vehicle.
3.2 If the surge tank was empty, start the en-
gine after refilling and check the level
again when the engine is at operating
temperature.
WARNING
Washer fluids may be flammable and poisonous. 05/24/2011 f602459
Do not expose washer fluid to an open flame or 1. Washer Reservoir Fill Tube
any burning material, such as a cigarette. Always
comply with the washer fluid manufacturers rec- Fig. 23.7, Windshield Washer Reservoir Location (right-
ommended safety precautions. hand side location shown)
4. Check the windshield washer reservoir fluid level. 3.1 Start the engine and ensure the low air
See Fig. 23.7. pressure lamp goes out and the buzzer
silences when pressure reaches approxi-
Cab Inspection mately 70 psi (483 kPa) in both air reser-
voirs.
1. Push the reset button on the dash-mounted air
intake restriction indicator, if equipped. The air governor should cut out at ap-
proximately 120 psi (827 kPa). For ve-
2. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, hicles with an optional dryer reservoir
check the air-pressure warning system. module (DRM), the cut-out pressure is
2.1
approximately 130 psi (896 kPa).
If not previously drained, drain the air res-
ervoirs using moderate brake applications 3.2 With the engine idling, apply the brake
until pressure in both reservoirs is less pedal several times. The air governor
than 70 psi (483 kPa). should cut in when pressure in the primary
2.2
air reservoir (top air gauge) reaches ap-
Turn the ignition to the ON position. The
proximately 100 psi (690 kPa).
ICU will complete a full gauge sweep and
bulb check, and an audible warning will 4. Check air pressure build-up time.
sound. Ensure the low air pressure lamp
4.1 With the air system fully charged, make
remains illuminated and an audible warn-
ing continues to sound after the gauge one full brake application and note the air
sweep is complete. pressure reading on the primary air
gauge.
3. Check air governor cut-in and cut-out pressures.
23.5
4.2 Further reduce air pressure using moder- engine, or under-hood components to access the
ate brake applications, then run the en- windshield or windows. Doing so could cause a
gine at governed rpm. fall and result in an injury.
4.3 Note the time that the pressure reaches 7. Inspect the mirrors, window glass, and wind-
the previously noted reading on the pri- shield for cracks or other damage.
mary air gauge, then note the time that
8. Ensure that the horn, windshield wipers, and
the air pressure reaches cut-out pressure.
windshield washers are operating properly.
4.4 If it takes longer than 30 seconds to reach These devices must be in good working order for
cut-out pressure after the primary air safe vehicle operation.
gauge passes the previously noted pres-
9. Ensure the heater and defroster are operating
sure (noted after one full brake applica-
properly.
tion), eliminate any leaks or replace the air
compressor before operating the vehicle. 10. Check the operation of all interior lights.
5. Check air leakage in the system. 10.1 Turn on the headlights and leave them on.
5.1 Ensure all equipped gauge bulbs illumi-
With the parking brake applied, the trans-
nate in the dash message center.
mission out of gear, and the air system
fully charged, release the service brakes 10.2 Ensure all equipped driver control
and shut down the engine. switches illuminate.
5.2 Wait one minute and note the air pressure 10.3 Ensure both turn signal indicator bulbs
drop in psi (kPa) per minute from the pri- illuminate in the dash message center
mary air reservoir. when the turn signal switch is activated.
If the pressure drop exceeds the limits 11. Check the operation of all exterior lights. See
shown in Table 23.1, eliminate any leaks Fig. 23.8.
before operating the vehicle.
5
Maximum Allowable Air Leakage 6
Pressure Drop: 5
Description psi (kPa) Per Minute
Released Applied
Truck or Tractor Only 2 (14) 3 (21)
Truck or Tractor w/Single Trailer 3 (21) 4 (28)
Truck or Tractor w/Two Trailers 5 (34) 6 (41)
4
Table 23.1, Maximum Allowable Air Leakage
3
6. Check the air pressure reserve.
With the engine still off, make one full brake ap-
plication and observe the pressure drop on the 2
primary air gauge. If pressure drops more than 1
25 psi (172 kPa), eliminate any leaks before op-
erating the vehicle.
2
1
05/04/2012 f545896
WARNING 1. Fog Light 4. Sidewall Turn Signal
2. Headlight 5. Clearance Light
When cleaning windshields and windows, always 3. Front Turn Signal 6. Marker Lights
stand on the ground or on a secure ladder or
platform. Use a long-handled window cleaner. Do Fig. 23.8, Exterior Lights
not use the cab steps, tires, fenders, fuel tanks,
23.6
11.1 Activate the high-beam headlights and open flames, or intense heat. These could ignite
hazard warning lights. the fuel, possibly causing severe burns.
11.2 Exit the cab and check that all exterior IMPORTANT: On engines that are equipped with
lights and reflectors are clean and intact. an exhaust ATS, use ultralow-sulfur diesel
11.3 Check that the brake lights, taillights, (ULSD) with 15 ppm sulfur content or less.
headlights, turn signals, marker lights, 13. Check the fuel level in the fuel tank(s). To keep
identification lights, and clearance lights condensation to a minimum, fuel tanks should be
are working properly. filled at the end of each day.
12. Inspect the seat belts and tether belts. 14. Adjust the rearview and down view mirrors as
necessary.
WARNING 15. Test the service brakes.
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of 15.1 With the engine running and air system
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire fully charged, set the parking brake.
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
15.2 Put the vehicle in the lowest gear and
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an
accident, and the seat belt system was in use, gently attempt to move it forward. The ve-
the entire vehicle seat belt system must be re- hicle should not move.
placed before operating the vehicle. Do not at- If the vehicle moves, the parking brakes
tempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so are not operating correctly and must be
could change the effectiveness of the system. repaired before the vehicle is operated.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
16. Test the backup alarm.
making any modifications to the system, may re-
sult in personal injury or death. 16.1 Release the parking brake and put the
12.1 Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme transmission in reverse.
dirt and dust, or for severe fading from 16.2 Move the vehicle slightly backward to en-
exposure to sunlight, especially near the sure that the backup alarm is operating
buckle latch plate and in the D-loop guide correctly.
area.
12.2 Check operation of the buckle, latch, web Weekly Post-Trip Inspections
retractor, and upper seat belt mount on
the door pillar. Check all visible compo-
and Maintenance
nents for wear or damage. Air Intake System Inspection
12.3 Check the seat belt and tether belt con- After resetting the air intake restriction indicator dur-
nection points and tighten any that are ing the daily pretrip inspection, check the indicator
loose. again with the engine off.
WARNING 1. Check an indicator with graduations to see if air

restriction exceeds the value shown in
Never fill fuel tanks to more than 95 percent of Table 23.2.
their liquid capacity. This could make them more Check a go/no-go indicator without graduations
likely to rupture from impact, possibly causing to see if the colored bar shows through the clear
fire and resulting in serious personal injury or window.
death by burning.
Do not mix gasoline or alcohol with diesel fuel.
This mixture could cause an explosion, possibly
resulting in serious personal injury or death. Do
not fill the fuel tanks in the presence of sparks,
23.7
Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values: inH2O 1.2 If the engine is equipped with a built-in
(mmH2) water separator, loosen the drain valve,
Pre-EPA07 (ADR EPA07 (ADR 80/ and allow the water to run out. Close the
Engine Make drain valve, taking care not to overtighten
80/02) Engines 03) Engines
Cummins 25 (635) 25 (635) it.
Detroit 20 (255) 22 (560) 1.3 Alliance/Racor Models: Turn the drain plug
Mercedes-Benz 22 (560) 22 (560) counterclockwise to open it. See
Table 23.2, Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values Fig. 23.9.
DAVCO Models: Remove the vent cap
2. If air restriction exceeds the maximum allowable and open the drain. See Fig. 23.10.
value, operate the vehicle for one more day,
making sure not to run the engine over rated 6
5
rpm. Refer to the engine operation manual for
more information on rated rpm for your engine. 4
If air restriction exceeds the maximum value 3
7
again, replace the air cleaner. For instructions,
refer to Group 09 of the Century Class Trucks
2
Workshop Manual.
Engine Compartment Inspection

Tilt the cab. See Chapter 2 for instructions.
8
1. Check for water in the fuel/water separator, if 1
equipped. 9
IMPORTANT: When draining fluid from a
fuel/water separator, drain the fluid into an 10
appropriate container and dispose of it prop-
erly. Many jurisdictions now issue fines for
11
draining fuel/water separators onto the
ground. 02/03/2010 f470552
1.1 Place a suitable container under the fuel/ 1. Washers (qty 2) 7. Mounting Head
water separator. 2. Nuts (qty 2) 8. Mounting Bolts (qty 2)
3. Frame Rail 9. Filter Element
NOTE: A hose may be used to direct water 4. Fuel Outlet Port 10. Sight Bowl
into the container. Use a hose with a -inch 5. Fuel Inlet Port 11. Drain Plug
pipe thread on DAVCO models. 6. Priming Pump
IMPORTANT: Water in the fuel/water separa- Fig. 23.9, Alliance Fuel/Water Separator Assembly and
tor will appear as beads. Drain the fuel/water Installation
separator only enough to remove the water. 1.4 Stop draining fluid when fuel begins to
Stop draining fluid when fuel begins to drain drain out.
out. If the fuel/water separator is drained of
Alliance/Racor Models: Turn the drain plug
fuel, it will be necessary to prime the fuel
clockwise to close it.
system before the vehicle can be started
again. DAVCO Models: Close the drain valve.
Install and hand-tighten the vent cap.
2. Inspect the steering components.
23.8
2.2 Check the steering gear mounting bolts

4 and pitman arm nut, if equipped, for signs
of looseness.
2.3 Check the drag link nuts for missing cotter
3 pins.
2.4 Inspect the steering intermediate shaft and
5 end yokes for excessive looseness or
other damage.
2
NOTICE
6 Do not drive with a drive belt that is visibly worn
or damaged. If it fails, the lack of coolant flow
could rapidly cause damage to engine compo-
1 nents.
05/05/2009 f470506b
3. Inspect the serpentine drive belts for signs of
1. Drain Valve 4. Vent Cap glazing, frayed edges, breaks, cracks, or oil con-
2. Lower Housing 5. Collar tamination.
3. Clear Cover 6. Inlet Port/Check Valve
4. Check the power steering reservoir fluid level.
Fig. 23.10, DAVCO Fuel/Water Separator (Fuel Pro 382
shown) The power steering fluid level should be between
the MIN COLD mark and the middle mark just
2.1 Inspect tie rods, steering arms, and the above it. If needed, fill the reservoir with auto-
drag link for signs of looseness (i.e., shiny matic transmission fluid that meets Dexron III or
spots or rust tracks). See Fig. 23.11. TES-389 specifications.
5. Inspect visible engine wiring for damage or
looseness. Check for loose wiring, chafed insula-
1 tion, and damaged or loose hold-down clamps.
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections

2
and Maintenance
Brake Component Inspection
1 Walk around the vehicle and inspect brake system
1
components for visible damage.
3 1. Inspect all visible brake system components for
3 missing fasteners or signs of looseness, such as
rust tracks.
NOTICE
05/06/98 f461664
1. Steering Gear Mounting Bolts If the external breather tube or breather cap is
2. Pitman Arm Pinch Bolt Nut missing or incorrectly installed, road dirt and de-
3. Drag Link Nut bris can adversely affect the operation of the
brake chamber. Once inside of the chamber, dirt
Fig. 23.11, Integral Steering Gear Fasteners and debris can cause the internal parts of the
chamber to deteriorate faster.
23.9
2. Inspect the exterior surfaces of brake chambers 2.1 Remove the battery box cover and inspect
for damage. Make sure that breather holes are all visible battery cables for loose wiring or
open and free of debris. damage.
NOTE: Do not route air brake lines on top of 2.2 Check that the battery hold-down is se-
anything likely to be stepped on. cure.
3. Inspect air brake lines for dents, swelling, kinks, Engine Compartment Inspection
twisting, abrasion, and damage, especially near
moving parts. Tilt the cab. See Chapter 2 for instructions.
4. Inspect flex air lines for deterioration or signs of 1. Check the hydraulic clutch reservoir, if equipped.
abrasion. If necessary, add DOT 4 brake fluid.
5. Inspect for cracked, worn, or oil-contaminated 2. Inspect the radiator and heater hoses, including
brake linings and brake drums (or rotors). the clamps and support brackets.
6. Check the thickness of the brake linings. Re- 2.1 Inspect the radiator and charge air cooler
place brake linings on all brake assemblies on for damage and accumulated debris.
the axle if any brake linings are worn to less than Straighten bent or damaged fins to permit
approximately 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) at the thinnest airflow across all areas of the cores.
point.
NOTE: When traveling through areas of high
Saddle Tank Area Inspection insect concentration, it may be necessary to
clean the exterior of the radiator or the
charge air cooler core as often as every 200
WARNING miles (322 km).
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into 2.2 Make sure the radiator inlet and outlet
the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or hoses are pliable and are not cracking or
sludge particles may be in the airstream and ballooning.
could cause injury.
2.3 Make sure the heater hoses are pliable
and are not cracking or ballooning.
NOTICE
2.4 Tighten hose clamps as necessary.
If the water drained from the air reservoirs is IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten hose
cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the
compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the
clamps, as hose life can be adversely af-
air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air fected.
brake system, which could adversely affect brak- 2.5 Ensure hose support brackets are se-
ing. curely fastened. Make sure hoses are not
1. Drain the brake system air reservoirs (reservoirs located near sources of wear, abrasion, or
with automatic drain valves only). high heat.
2. Inspect the batteries. IMPORTANT: When replacing hoses, install
service-type knitted or braided yarn-reinforced
WARNING neoprene hose. Extended-service-life silicone
hoses may also be used. See the Alliance Parts
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories Catalog at www.alliancebrandparts.com or
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals contact your Freightliner dealer.
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. To prevent possible per-
sonal injury, always wash your hands after han-
dling battery parts and related accessories.
23.10
Index
Subject Page Subject Page

A Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Center Dash Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
ABTS Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Armrest Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Radio and CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Backrest Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Cushion Extension Cab Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Air Selection Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Bunk Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Fan Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Seat Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Recirculation Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Seat Tilt Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Temperature Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Shoulder Belt Height Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Cab Load Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Track Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Cab Tilt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
Adjustable Steering Column Hydraulic Lockup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Returning the Cab to
Adjusting Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1 Operating Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 Tilting the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
Automatic Slack Adjusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Brake System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
Brake System General Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Checking Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Brake System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Air-Suspension Dump Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Daily Pretrip Inspection
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
B Monthly Post-trip Inspection
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2
Back-of-Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Weekly Post-trip Inspection
Accessing Back-of-Cab Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2
Exiting the Back-of-Cab Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Circuit Breaker/Relay Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Battery Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Bostrom Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Cab Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Backrest Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Sleeper Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Bottom Cushion Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4
Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Clutch General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Clutch Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6
Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Clutch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
C Cruise at a particular speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Disengage cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Cab Access, Fixed Steps ................... 2.1
Left Side Entry . . . . . ................... 2.1
Left Side Exit . . . . . . ................... 2.2 D
Right Side Entry . . . . ................... 2.3 Daily Pretrip Inspection and
Right Side Exit . . . . . ................... 2.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Cab Access, Mobile Stairs ................... 2.4 Cab Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.5
Left Side Entry . . . . . ................... 2.4 Forward Engine
Left Side Exit . . . . . . ................... 2.5 Compartment Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4
Mobile Stair Lock-Up Saddle Tank Area
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3
Right Side Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Suspension and Slack
Right Side Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Adjuster Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Wheel and Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
I-1
Index

Dashboard Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1 Creep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 Engine Overspeed
Antilock Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Engine Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
Parking Brake Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Engine Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Trailer Air Supply Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Hill Start Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Trailer Brake Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Load-Based Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10
Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 Low (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
Differential Lock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 Manual Mode (MAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
Differential Lock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1 Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Shuttle Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Driver Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 Skip Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
ICU2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17 Eaton Fuller Transmission,
ICU3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14 Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
ICU4M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 Emergency Filter Replacement,
DAVCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Emergency Kit, Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
E Emergency Starting With
Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Eaton Fuller AutoShift
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10 Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5
General Information, Engine Brake Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6
AutoShift Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10 Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Operation, AutoShift Cold-Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10 Engine Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Eaton Fuller Splitter and High-Altitude Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Range-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Eaton Fuller 10-Speed Safety and Environmental
Range-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Eaton Fuller 13-Speed Engine ProtectionWarning
Splitter and Range-Shift and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Eaton Fuller 18-Speed
Splitter and Range-Shift Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 Cold-Weather Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
General Information, Range- Starting After Extended
Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
General Information, Splitter Exhaust Aftertreatment System,
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Eaton Fuller UltraShift DM ATS Warning Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
General Information, Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Ultrashift Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 EzyRider Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Operation, UltraShift Armrest Angle (optional
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 armrests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Ultrashift Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5 Backrest Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Eaton Fuller UltraShift PLUS Bottom Cushion Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6 Fore-and-Aft Slide
Auto Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Auto Start Gear Selection Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
and Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9 Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Automatic Mode (AUTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Automatic Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
Clutch Abuse Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
Coasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10
I-2
Index

F Application Air Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Coupling, Fontaine or Drive Axle Oil Temperature
Holland Fifth Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Coupling, Jost Fifth Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Fifth Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5 Engine Oil Temperature
Air Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4 Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Air-Actuated Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4 Primary and Secondary Air
Manual Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4 Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Fifth Wheels, General Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Air-Suspension Dump Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Transmission Fluid
Fifth Wheel Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1 Turbocharger Boost
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
In Case of a Cab Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.6
Interaxle Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Fluids Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2
Interaxle Lock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Freightliner High-Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Interaxle Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Backrest Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Bottom Cushion Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Fore/Aft Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 L
Fore/Aft Seat Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Front Cushion Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Exterior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Interior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Low Voltage Disconnect
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Rear Cushion Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Shock Absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Freightliner SmartShift Shift
M
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 Meritor WABCO Antilock
Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
H Automatic Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5
Trailer ABS Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Holland Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 Monthly Post-Trip Inspections
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.9
Trailer Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 Brake Component Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.9
Trailer Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 Engine Compartment
Horn Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.10
Air Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Saddle Tank Area Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.10
Electric Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
N
I National Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Ignition Switch and Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Backrest Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Instrumentation Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Bottom Cushion Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Ignition Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
Air Intake Restriction Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
I-3
Index

Rear Cushion Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Suspension/Trailer Connection
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Air Suspension Dump
O Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Opening the Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Fifth Wheel Slide Control
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Overhead Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19
Trailer Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
P T
Periodic Inspections and
Maintenance, General Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1 Front Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Rear Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5
Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Aftertreatment System
Regen Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
V
Axle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
Engine Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Chewing Gum or Wax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
Hill Start Aid Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Grease and Oil-Based Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
PTO Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 Mildew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
Transmission Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 Sugar and Water-Based
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1 Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
Premier Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2 Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2 Ball Point Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
Trailer Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2 Chewing Gum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Trailer Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
Nail Polish and Nail Polish
Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
S Ordinary Dirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Paint, Shoe Heel Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Seat Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 Shoe Polish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
Seat Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 Sulfide Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Seats, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Sleeper Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 W
Baggage Compartment
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Warning and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Bunk Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Engine Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Weekly Post-Trip Inspections
and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.7
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Air Intake System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.7
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Engine Compartment
Sleeper Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.8
Fan Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Temperature Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Windshield Wiper/Washer
Sleeper Compartment Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Bunk Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Bunk Restraint Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Steering System General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Steering Wheel Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Inspection and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
I-4

Argosy Driver's Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Argosy Driver's Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Argosy Driver's Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARGOSY

Introduction if an air bag is installed, or if the vehicle features a

Environmental Concerns and

Event Data Recorder

Component Information Label

Fig. 1.1, Component Information Label

Left Side Entry

would going down a flight of stairs. It is easier to 7

NOTE: The left side of the cab is equipped with

6. Move your right foot to the bottom step. 4

7. Step to the ground with your left foot first. 3

Right Side Entry 2

7 Left Side Exit

1. Bottom Step 5. Aft Grab Handle Right Side Entry

NOTE: The right side of the cab is equipped

Mobile Stair Lock-Up Procedures

5. Open and close the door again. If the steps still

touch any part of the exhaust system other than

Exiting the Back-of-Cab Area

Opening the Grille Fig. 2.9, Opening the Grille

Tilting the Cab

8. When the cab reaches a 30-degree angle, stop

1. Safety Stop 3. Tilt Cylinder

Any of the above situations will lock the tilt cylinders.

Low Voltage Disconnect

The batteries are typically located aft wall of the cab/

Instrumentation Control Units Ignition Sequence

100 8 E F 110 350

OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT

Warning and Indicator Lights

Common Warning and Indicator Lamps

Indicates the coolant temperature is above the maximum

Indicates air pressure in the primary or secondary reservoir

Indicates the engine oil pressure is below the minimum

Indicates the parking brake is engaged. An audible alert

Activates with an audible alert when the system detects that

High Exhaust System IMPORTANT: When the HEST lamp is illuminated, do

Common Warning and Indicator Lamps

Malfunction Indicator Indicates an emissions-related fault. See the engine

Momentary illumination indicates the vehicle ABS is

NO Indicates the alternator is not properly powering the Amber

Indicates the fuel may contain water. Drain any water

Check Transmission Indicates an undesirable transmission condition.

Transmission Overheat Indicates high transmission temperature.

Flashing indicates the ATC system is active, or the ATC

Engine Brake Indicates the engine brake is enabled.

Common Warning and Indicator Lamps

Flashing indicates the outside right-turn signal lights are

High-Beam Headlights Indicates the high-beam headlights are on. Blue

Table 4.1, Common Warning and Indicator Lamps

EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION

Fig. 4.5, ATS Warning Lamps

Instruments Vehicles may be equipped with a go/no-go restriction

Fig. 4.7, Manual-Reset Air Restriction Indicator, Go/

If air restriction exceeds the maximum allowable

A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not

200 to 260F (93 to 126C) for Detroit and Tachometer